Download: Mirror Download [FCC.gov] Document ID 856099 Application ID YdmgZNGylZBKQigK0Ylp2w== Document Description User Manual Part 2 Short Term Confidential No Permanent Confidential No Supercede No Document Type User Manual Display Format Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf Filesize 244.69kB (3058580 bits) Date Submitted 2007-10-18 00:00:00 Date Available 2007-11-28 00:00:00 Creation Date 2007-10-11 15:21:43 Producing Software Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows) Document Lastmod 2007-10-11 15:21:52 Document Title Users Manual Document Creator FrameMaker 7.2 Document Author: Administrator
Continuous Shooting
Shooting Still Images
You can shoot still images by using the camera. The
shot still images are saved to a folder within the âMy
pictureâ folder in the FOMA phone or to the microSD
memory card.
pSee âStorage setting (Store in)â and âSelect storageâ for
selecting a storage location.
pSee page 274 for how to display saved still images.
You can continuously shoot still images. You can set
the number of frames, and shooting interval for autoshooting. (See page 144)
cc(
Press Oo(
Shoot a Still Image
Press c.
Press Oo(
Oo(
).
A still image is shot. The Post View display for
confirmation appears.
pWhen you shoot with the outside camera with âFocusâ
set to âAutoâ, shooting starts after the subject is focused
on.
pThe image appears horizontally reversed (mirrored)
when you shoot with the inside camera; however the
image is correctly displayed when played back.
pWhen you set âAuto save setâ to âONâ, the Post View
display does not appear; the still image is automatically
saved. Go to step 4.
pThe camera starts
in the mode you
used last time,
âAutoâ, âManualâ,
or âAuto bracketâ.
To change
Finder display
Continuous Mode,
see âContinuous modeâ of âCont. shooting set.â.
).
Continuous shooting starts.
If you set âContinuous modeâ to âManualâ, press
Oo(
) the number of times of shooting frames. The
Post View display for confirmation appears.
pWhen you shoot with the outside camera with âFocusâ
set to âAutoâ, shooting starts after the subject is focused
on.
pTo cancel shooting midway, press r. If you shoot in
the âAutoâ or âAuto bracketâ mode of âContinuous
).
modeâ, you can cancel also by pressing l(
You can cancel shooting also by closing the FOMA
phone.
pThe image appears horizontally reversed (mirrored)
when you shoot with the inside camera; however the
image is correctly displayed when played back.
pWhen you set âAuto save setâ to âONâ, the Post View
display does not appear; the still images are
automatically saved. Go to step 5.
)Select a destination folder.
The still image you shot is saved.
pTo save the still image as an
mirrored image (horizontally
reversed), press i(
and select âMirror saveâ.
pWhen you set âStore inâ to
âmicroSDâ, the still image is
saved to the folder selected by
âSelect storageâ.
pPress r to cancel the shot
still image and return to the
Finder display.
Post View display
Press h to end the camera.
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Finder display
Camera
pThe Camera menu is displayed
by mLifeKitCamera.
You can start also by selecting
âPhoto modeâ from the camera
menu.
pYou can paste the Camera
menu to the desktop. (See
page 114)
pFit the direction of the FOMA
phone to the direction of the Top
icon.
)c(
139
3
To select a still image and save it
Select a still image and press c(
Oo(
Function menu
Save
See page 139 and page 140.
Mirror save
See page 139 and page 140.
Detailed display
Attach
location
Camera
pPress No from the detailed display to show the
previous or next still image.
pTo save the still image as a mirrored image (horizontally
reversed), press i(
) and select âMirror saveâ.
To select multiple still images and save them
Put a check mark for still images to be saved
l(
)Save or Mirror save
To save all still images
l(
)Save or Mirror save
pPress r from the Post View display to cancel the
shot still image and return to the Finder display.
Operation/Explanation
Attach to mail You can save the still image you shot and
attach it to i-mode mail.
Select a folder.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
pYou can compose an i-mode mail also by
pressing l(
).
Post View display
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Photo
Mode/Detailed Display in Continuous Mode
pPress l(
) from the confirmation
display for the location information to restart
measuring in âQuality modeâ.
Select a destination folder.
pWhen you set âStore inâ to âmicroSDâ, the still image is
saved to the folder selected by âSelect storageâ.
Set display
Press h to end the camera.
Information
pThe image quality may be coarse depending on âImage
sizeâ or âDisplay sizeâ.
pWhen you shoot, the tone selected for âShutter soundâ
sounds regardless of the settings such as Manner Mode.
The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be changed.
pEven when a mail message comes in while shooting, the
shooting operation continues. Though unread message icon
is displayed, the Mail Receiving display is not displayed.
pIf you end the camera function by using Multitask while
shooting, unsaved still images are deleted.
pWhen shooting, hold the FOMA phone securely to avoid
blurred images.
pWhile you are shooting in Photo Mode or âManualâ of
Continuous Mode, the photo light flickers. In âAutoâ/âAuto
bracketâ of Continuous Mode, it lights.
Select an item.
By position loc.
. . Measures the current location and store
the location information. After checking the
).
location information, press Oo(
From loc. history
. . . Select a location information detail from
Location History and store it.
pWhen you press i(
) during
measuring the current location, the
confirmation display appears asking
whether to display the result obtained so far
from the location information.
pTo cancel measuring the current location,
press r or l(
).
You can paste the still image to the Stand-by
display and others for displaying. This is
available only in Photo Mode.
Select a folder.
Go to âSet displayâ on page 274.
pEven when âStore inâ is set to âmicroSDâ,
the still image is saved to the FOMA phone.
Change frame You can replace the frame added to the shot
still image by new one. This is available only
in Photo Mode.
Select a frame.
pPress No to bring up the previous or next
frame.
pTo reselect a frame, press l(
).
Oo(
pYou cannot release the frame.
Normal display/ You can switch between a correct image and
Mirror display a mirrored image (horizontally reversed).
Store in
See page 144.
Display size
See page 145.
File restriction See page 146.
Icon
140
You can set whether to display icons.
ON or OFF
Function menu
Cancel
Operation/Explanation
You do not save the shot still image.
Press Oo(
Press Oo(
Oo(
Function Menu of the Post View Display in
Continuous Mode
pIf you select a still image from the Post View display and
press Oo(
), â â is added. Press Oo(
) again
to release the selection.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Save
See page 141.
Store all/
animatân
You can save all the shot still images to store
as an original animation.
Save
pTo save as a mirrored image (horizontally
reversed), select âMirror saveâ.
Store in
See page 144.
Normal display/ You can switch between a correct image and
Mirror display a mirrored image (horizontally reversed).
File restriction You can set the file restrictions on the image
on the Post View display.
File unrestricted or File restricted
pSee page 146 for the file restrictions.
Cancel
You do not save the shot still images.
Information
pWhen âStore inâ is set to âmicroSDâ, this function is not available.
pIf you have shot a single still image only, this function is not
available.
Shooting Moving Images
Recording starts.
pWhen you shoot with the outside camera with âFocusâ
set to âAutoâ, shooting starts after the subject is focused
on. The focus is automatically focused on the subject
regardless of âFocusâ while shooting.
pWhen you shoot with the inside camera, the horizontally
reversed (mirrored) image is displayed, but it is
displayed normally when played back.
).
Recording ends. The Post View display for confirmation
appears.
pRecording automatically ends when a call comes in, the
low battery alarm sounds, or the FOMA phone is closed
during recording.
pWhen you set âAuto save setâ to âONâ, or set âFile size
settingâ to âLong timeâ, the Post View display does not
appear; the moving image is automatically saved. When
you set âStore inâ to âmicroSDâ, the moving image is
saved to the folder set by âSelect storageâ. Go to step 5.
Camera
Select a folder
).
)Select a destination folder.
The moving image you shot is
saved.
pPress r to cancel the shot
moving image and return to the
Finder display.
Post View display
Press h to end the camera.
You can shoot moving images by using a camera. The
shot moving images are saved to a folder within the
âimotionâ folder in the FOMA phone or to the
microSD memory card.
pFor selecting a storage location, see âStore inâ and âSelect
storageâ.
pSee page 280 for playing back the saved moving images.
cc(
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
pThe Camera menu is displayed
by mLifeKitCamera.
You can start also by selecting
âMovie modeâ from the camera
menu.
pYou can paste the Camera
menu to the desktop. (See
page 114)
Finder display
141
Camera
â If recording ends or the image quality deteriorates
while shooting
When you use a microSD memory card that you repeatedly
save/delete data files to/from, the writing speed slows down,
recording might end midway or the image quality might
deteriorate.
Do the following operations to improve such symptoms:
1. Copy all the data files from the microSD memory card
onto your personal computer as they are.
pWhen your personal computer is set so as to hide
folders and files, change the settings to display those
folders and files, and then operate. For how to change
the settings, refer to the operating manual or Help on the
personal computer you use.
pDo not change the names of folders and files copied to
the personal computer.
2. Use the personal computer to delete all the data files
on the microSD memory card.
pDo not format the microSD memory card. The data files
might not be played back.
3. Copy the data files copied in step 1 back to the
microSD memory card.
pBe sure to copy them back to the same microSD memory
card. Even if you save the copyrighted data files on another
microSD memory card, you cannot play them back.
Information
pThe shutter tone set by âShutter soundâ sounds when shooting
starts and ends regardless of the settings such as Manner
Mode. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be changed.
pIf you do key operations while recording, the operation
sound may be picked up.
pThe photo light lights during recording.
pWhen you switch the subject you are shooting to a subject
with a difference in perspective, it takes a time to focus on
the new subject.
pWhen you have difficulty focusing on some subject, switch
the subject. Then the subject might come into focus.
pThe speed of auto focus to work is slowed down in a dim place.
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Movie Mode
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Play
See page 280.
Save
See page 141.
Attach to mail You can save the recorded moving image and
attach it to i-mode mail.
Select a folder.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
pYou can compose an i-mode mail also by
pressing l(
).
Set as
stand-by
You can save the recorded moving image and
set it for the Stand-by display.
Select a folder.
Store in
See page 144.
142
Function menu
Display size
Operation/Explanation
See page 145.
File restriction See page 146.
Icon
You can set whether to display icons.
ON or OFF
Cancel
You do not save the recorded moving image.
Information
pSome moving images might not be displayed correctly.
pSee page 105 for playback of the moving image set for the
Stand-by display.
Changing Settings for Shooting Images
You can set a camera when shooting images.
Use Zoom
You can display the image through the camera in
âWideâ or âTeleâ.
The maximum magnification for each size is as follows:
â Outside camera
The maximum
Camera
Level of magnifications
Size
mode
zoom
(Approx.)
5M (2592 x 1944)
3.7M Wide (2592 x 1456)
3M (2048 x 1536)
2M Wide (1920 x 1080)
2M (1600 x 1200)
Photo
Stand-by (480 x 854)
VGA (640 x 480)
CIF (352 x 288)
QVGA (240 x 320)
QCIF (176 x 144)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
VGA (640 x 480)
CIF (352 x 288)
Continuous
QVGA (240 x 320)
QCIF (176 x 144)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
VGA (640 x 480)
Movie
HVGA Wide (640 x 352)
(Image
QVGA (320 x 240)
stabilizer:
QCIF (176 x 144)
Auto)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
VGA (640 x 480)
Movie
HVGA Wide (640 x 352)
(Image
QVGA (320 x 240)
stabilizer:
QCIF (176 x 144)
OFF)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
1 level
1.0 times
1 level
1.0 times
6 levels 1.2 times
6 levels 1.3 times
11 levels 1.6 times
11 levels 1.5 times
31 levels 3.0 times
31 levels 5.5 times
31 levels 8.1 times
31 levels 11.0 times
31 levels 15.1 times
11 levels 1.9 times
21 levels 2.7 times
31 levels 3.8 times
31 levels 5.5 times
31 levels 7.5 times
11 levels 1.6 times
11 levels 1.6 times
21 levels 2.4 times
31 levels 4.4 times
31 levels 6.0 times
11 levels 1.9 times
11 levels 1.9 times
21 levels 3.0 times
21 levels 5.5 times
31 levels 7.5 times
â Inside camera
Camera
mode
Size
VGA (640 x 480)
CIF (352 x 288)
Photo/
QVGA (240 x 320)
Continuous
QCIF (176 x 144)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
VGA (640 x 480)
HVGA Wide (640 x 352)
QVGA (320 x 240)
Movie
QCIF (176 x 144)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
Level of
zoom
1 level
11 levels
11 levels
31 levels
31 levels
1 level
1 level
21 levels
31 levels
31 levels
The maximum
magnifications
(Approx.)
1.0 times
1.6 times
1.5 times
3.3 times
5.0 times
1.0 times
1.0 times
2.0 times
3.3 times
5.0 times
Finder display
Use No to adjust the magnification.
Information
pYou cannot use the photo light when the battery level shows
very low.
Setting Image Size and Image Quality
Function Menu of the Finder Display
Function menu
Inside camera/ You can switch between the inside camera
Outside camera and outside camera.
CHG
Select a mode.
camera-mode pWhen you select âContinuous modeâ, the
camera starts in the mode you used last
time, âAutoâ, âManualâ, or âAuto bracketâ.
Image size
Use Autofocus
You can shoot with the outside camera after confirming
the focus conditions. You can use Autofocus, even if
âFocusâ is set to âClose-upâ or âLandscapeâ.
Finder displayXo
When the subject is focused, a confirmation tone sounds,
then the frame becomes green and the focus is locked.
When the subject is not focused, the frame becomes red.
pPress r to focus again.
Press Oo(
).
pIf âFocusâ is set to âAutoâ, the subject is automatically
focused on and shot when you press Oo(
) from
the Finder display.
Information
pIf âMovie type setâ is set to âVoiceâ in Movie Mode, you
cannot use Autofocus.
Photo Light
At Camera start-up
OFF
You can light the photo light as a spare light for when you
use the outside camera to shoot in a dark place. In Photo
Mode, the photo light flashes strong at the instant the
shutter is pressed.
Finder displayi(
ON or OFF
)Photo light
pThe photo light returns to the flickering state when you
do not operate for about 30 seconds. Further, it goes off
when you show the Post View display.
File size setting Select an item.
[Movie Mode Mail restrictân (S)
. . . . You can shoot up to 500 Kbytes.
only]
Mail restrictân (L)
. . . . You can shoot up to 2 Mbytes.
Long time
. . . You can shoot for a long time. The moving
image is saved to the microSD memory card.
Image quality You can set the image quality for saving.
Select an image quality.
Camera settings You can adjust to -3 (dark) through +3
(Brightness)
(bright).
At Camera start-up BrightnessSelect a brightness level.
Âą0
Camera settings You can adjust the coloring of the image on the
(White balance) Finder display to create a natural color tone.
At Camera start-up White balanceSelect an item.
Auto . . . For adjusting white balance automatically
Auto
Fine . . . For shooting outdoors in fine weather
Cloudy
. . . . . . . For shooting in cloudy weather or in
the shade
Light bulb
. . . . . . . For shooting under incandescent light
Fluorescent light
. . . . . . .For shooting under fluorescent lighting
Camera settings Color mode setSelect a color mode.
(Color mode set) Normal. . . . . . . . . Shoots in normal color.
At Camera start-up Sepia . . . . . . . . . . Shoots in sepia color.
Monochrome . . . Shoots in monochrome.
Normal
Vivid . . . . . . . . . . Makes the contours vivid,
raises the saturation, and
then shoots.
Natural . . . . . . . . . Makes the contours smooth,
downs the saturation, and
then shoots.
Whitening . . . . . . Shoots faces in bright color.
Suntan. . . . . . . . . Shoots faces in dark color.
143
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Information
pYou cannot use the photo light when âMovie type setâ is set
to âVoiceâ in Movie Mode.
Select an image size.
pWhen you shoot a photo for sending during
a voice call, you can select only âQCIF (176
x 144)â and âSub-QCIF (128 x 96)â.
Camera
Information
pThe image quality may slightly change when you select
âWideâ or âTeleâ.
pâTeleâ is released in the following cases:
ăťWhen you press -h to end the camera
ăťWhen a size is changed
ăťWhen camera mode is switched
Operation/Explanation
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Camera settings You can set a photo mode suitable for the
(Photo mode) place.
Camera
At Camera start-up Photo modeSelect a photo mode.
Normal
Normal. . . . . . . Standard mode
Portrait . . . . . . For shooting portraits
Sports . . . . . . . For shooting moving
subjects such as athletes
Food . . . . . . . . For shooting dishes
Scenery . . . . . . For shooting scenery
Night mode . . . For shooting in dark places
such as in nighttime
Backlight . . . . . For shooting against the sun
(from behind)
Character . . . . For shooting characters
Snow . . . . . . . . For shooting in snowy
places
Sunset . . . . . . . For shooting in sunset
Pet . . . . . . . . . . For shooting pets, etc.
Camera settings You can set the focus of the outside camera.
(Focus)
FocusSelect an item.
At Camera start-up Auto . . . . . . . . For focusing automatically
Auto
before shooting
(See page 143)
Close-up . . . . For focusing on a subject in a
short distance
Landscape . . For focusing on a landscape
in a long distance
Camera settings You can set a shutter sound. You can set a
(Shutter sound) shutter sound each for Photo Mode
(Continuous Mode) and Movie Mode.
Shutter soundSelect a shutter sound.
pWhile you are selecting, the shutter tone
sounds for confirmation.
Camera settings You can suppress blur on the Finder display
(Flicker
for when shooting with the outside camera.
correction)
Flicker correction
Auto, Mode 1 (50Hz) or Mode 2 (60Hz)
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Storage setting You can set the storage location for the still or
(Store in)
moving images you shot.
Store inPhone or microSD
Storage setting You can set whether to automatically save the
(Auto save set) image after shooting. When âStore inâ is
âPhoneâ, the image is saved to the âCameraâ
folder. When âStore inâ is âmicroSDâ, the
image is saved to the folder set by âSelect
storageâ.
Auto save setON or OFF
Storage setting See page 146.
(File restriction)
Img. stabilizer You can correct camera shake for when
[Photo/Movie shooting with the outside camera.
Mode]
Auto or OFF
Photo light
See page 143.
Auto timer
See page 146.
Shooting effect You can shoot a still image with a frame.
Shoot with frameON or OFF
(Shoot with
frame)
Select a frame.
At Camera start-up
OFF
[Photo Mode
only]
Shooting effect You can shoot a personâs face with a cushy
(Cushy mark) mark pasted. The cushy mark is automatically
At Camera start-up pasted in an appropriate position.
OFF
Cushy markON or OFF
[Photo/Movie Select a cushy mark.
Mode]
Cont.
Continuous modeSelect a mode.
shooting set. Auto
(Continuous . . . Shoots automatically at an interval and
mode)
with the number of frames as specified by
âShot intervalâ and âShot numberâ.
[Continuous
Mode only]
Manual
. . . Shoots one by one manually with the number
of frames specified by âShot numberâ.
Auto bracket
. . Shoots automatically nine still images at an
interval of about 0.3 second while changing
the brightness and color tone one by one.
pSelect âManualâ to display the number of
frames for continuous shooting.
Cont.
Shot intervalSelect a shooting interval.
shooting set. pYou can set this only in âAutoâ of Continuous
(Shot interval) Mode.
[Continuous
Mode only]
144
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Cont.
Shot number
shooting set. Enter the number of photos.
(Shot number) pWhen âImage sizeâ is set to âVGA (640 x
480)â or âCIF (352 x 288)â, you cannot
[Continuous
change âShot numberâ.
Mode only]
pYou can set this only in âAutoâ or âManualâ
of Continuous Mode.
Movie type set You can select whether to record both the
At Camera start-up video and voice, or one of them when you
Normal
shoot the moving image.
[Movie Mode Normal, Video, or Voice
only]
You can set whether to display a moving image
or still image in the original size (Actual size) or
to fit to the screen size on the Finder display.
Actual size or Fit in display
Common
replay mode
[Movie Mode
only]
You can set a shooting size appropriate for
attaching to i-mode mail.
YES
pImage Size is set to âQCIFâ, File Size Setting
is set to âMail restrictân (S)â, and Image
Quality (Movie Mode) is set to âNormalâ.
Icon
You can set whether to display icons.
ON or OFF
Memory info
You can display the used memory space
(estimate)/number of stored items.
Information
pWhen âImage sizeâ is set to larger than âStand-by (480 x
854)â, and you switch to the inside camera, the camera
starts up in âVGA (640 x 480)â.
pWhen the âFile size settingâ is set to âLong timeâ, âStore inâ
is set to âmicroSDâ.
pNote that the image may blur in Night Mode because the
exposure takes a longer time.
pIf you set âFlicker correctionâ to âAutoâ, it may take a while to
automatically adjust the image quality. In this case, switch
to Mode 1 or Mode 2 according to the power frequency
provided in the shooting location.
pEven if you change the setting of âBrightnessâ, âWhite
balanceâ, âColor mode setâ, or âFocusâ, when you change
âPhoto modeâ, their settings are changed to the setting fit to
each photo mode.
pSee âSelect storageâ for how to set a storage location on the
microSD memory card.
pIf you change âFile size settingâ to âLong timeâ, âStore inâ is
set to âmicroSDâ and âStorage settingâ cannot be operated.
pWhen âAuto save setâ is set to âONâ, the image is saved to
the latest folder if âSelect storageâ is not set or the folder set
as a destination folder is deleted.
pWhen you set âImage sizeâ to larger than âHVGA Wide (640
x 352)â, the setting is always âFit in displayâ.
pWhen you set âImage sizeâ to âQCIF (176 x 144)â, or
âSub-QCIF (128 x 96)â, the image is enlarged at both
lengthwise and sidewise two times to be displayed in
âActual sizeâ.
pThe setting on the Finder display is reflected on the Post
View display; however the setting on the Post View display
is not reflected on the Finder display.
pYou cannot operate when you set âFile size settingâ to âLong
timeâ.
145
Camera
Display size
Information
pThis function is only for decreasing the degree of camera shake,
so its effect differs depending on the subject or condition.
pImage Stabilizer might not work effectively in the following
cases:
ăťWhen the camera shakes to a great extent
ăťWhen zooming is in use
ăťWhen shooting moving subjects
pWhen âPhoto modeâ is set to âSportsâ, âNight modeâ, or
âPetâ in Photo Mode, âImg. stabilizerâ become invalid.
pIt might happen that residual image remains in the area
where the subject is moving, or noise is found in overall
area. In that case, set this function to âOFFâ.
pIn Movie Mode, as peripheral pixels are used for the
process of Image Stabilizer, the shooting range differs
depending on the âAutoâ or âOFFâ setting.
pWhen this function is activated in Photo Mode, the
processing time after shooting might be longer about two
seconds because of the process of Image Stabilizer.
pYou cannot use Image Stabilizer for the inside camera.
pWhen âImage sizeâ is set to larger than â2M (1600 x 1200)â,
you cannot shoot with a frame.
pIf you shoot a still image with a frame using the inside camera
and save it, the frame is also horizontally reversed when the
still image is automatically reversed as a correct image.
pYou cannot save the still image shot with a frame as the
mirrored image.
pWhen âImage sizeâ is set to larger than âStand-by (480 x
854)â, cushy marks cannot be pasted in Photo Mode.
pThe number of shots that can be set differs depending on the
image size. The number of shots that can be set is as follows:
VGA (640 x 480): 4
CIF (352 x 288): 4
QVGA (240 x 320): 5 through 10
QCIF (176 x 144): 5 through 20
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96): 5 through 20
File Restriction
Camera
You can set the file restrictions for when you save the
shot still or moving image. The operation of attaching
to i-mode mail is disabled at the receiving end who has
received the image as the first distribution.
Finder displayi(
Storage settingFile restriction
or
Post View display in Photo Mode, Movie
Mode or Photo sending/Detailed display in
Continuous Modei(
File restriction
File unrestricted or File restricted
â When Auto Timer is set to âONâ
â
â appears on the Finder display.
), a confirmation tone sounds and
If you press Oo(
â
â blinks. The photo light flickers every about 1 second until
about 5 seconds before shooting. From about 5 seconds before
shooting, the photo light flickers every about 0.5 second, and
the confirmation tone sounds every about 1 second. Shooting
takes place after the set delay time has elapsed.
pTo cancel shooting, press l(
) or r while the
photo light is flickering. Even if you cancel shooting, âAuto
timerâ stays set to âONâ.
pYou can shoot immediately by pressing Oo(
before the delay time has elapsed.
pWhen you shoot, a confirmation tone sounds regardless of
the settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for
the confirmation tone cannot be changed.
Information
pYou cannot use Auto Timer in âManualâ of Continuous Mode.
â For âFile unrestrictedâ
First distribution
Secondary distribution
pAuto Timer will be set to âOFFâ when shooting ends.
Attach to mail
Your FOMA
phone
Attach to mail
Destination mobile
phone
â For âFile restrictedâ
First distribution
Secondary distribution
Using Bar Code Reader
You can use the outside camera to scan JAN codes and
QR codes and store them as data.
From the scanned data, you can make calls, compose
i-mode mail messages, and access Internet web pages,
and so on.
â When scanning with Bar Code Reader
Attach to mail
Your FOMA
phone
Attach to mail
Destination mobile
phone
Information
pEven when you set âFile restrictionâ to âFile restrictedâ, the
still or moving images can be output from the destination
mobile phone by transmitting the images using infrared data
exchange or by copying them to the microSD memory card.
pAfter saving, you can use âFile restrictionâ on page 275 to
change the settings.
pWhen you set âFile size settingâ to âLong timeâ in Movie
Mode, âFile restrictionâ becomes âFile unrestrictedâ.
Auto Timer
At Camera start-up
OFF
Finder displayi(
)Auto timer
ON or OFFEnter a delay time (seconds).
pEnter from â01â through â15â, in two digits.
146
Guide frame
pTake the character strings as large as possible within the
guide frame.
pAutofocus works when you scan a code about 10 cm or more
away from it. When you scan a code in the out-of-focus state,
the recognition rate lowers.
pScan so that the camera is in parallel with the code.
â JAN Code
JAN Code is a bar code that denotes numerals with the
vertical bars of a different width.
You can scan 8-digit (JAN8) and 13-digit (JAN13) JAN codes.
pâ4942857112597â is displayed
when you scan this bar code
with the FOMA phone.
â QR Code
QR Code is one of the 2-dimensional codes that denotes
data in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Kanji, katakana, alphanumeric characters, and
pictographs are displayed when you scan it.
Some QR codes have image or melody information.
Press Oo(
i(
pâć Şĺźäźç¤žNTTăăłă˘â is displayed when
you scan this QR code with the FOMA
phone.
Scan a Code
At Bar Code Reader
start-up
Photo light: OFF
Brightness: Âą0
Zoom: Magnified view
You can store up to 5 scanned codes.
You can scan up to 16 divided QR codes.
mLifeKitBar code reader
Scan code
The Bar Code Reader menu is displayed.
pYou can paste the Bar Code Reader menu to the
desktop. (See page 114)
Fit a code to be scanned to the guide frame
and press Xo.
When the focus is locked, a
confirmation tone sounds and the
cross mark becomes green.
pPress m to set the photo light
to âONâ or âOFFâ.
pPress i(
) and select
âBrightnessâ; then you can adjust
brightness to -3 (dark) through
Scanning Code display
+3 (bright).
pPress Co to show the reduced display, and press Vo
to return to the former display.
).
The code is scanned. (The shutter tone does not sound.)
pTo cancel scanning, press r or Oo(
).
pWhen scanning is completed, the scanning completion
tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator lights. The
sound level is fixed and cannot be changed. However,
the tone does not sound in Manner Mode or while
âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ is set to âSilentâ.
pâ
â is displayed for melody files and â
â or â
â is
displayed for incompatible or damaged files.
pWhile you are entering (editing) characters, the Scanned
Code Result display does not appear; the Text Data
Confirmation display of the scanned code appears. To
). To discard
enter the scanned code, press Oo(
it, press l(
) or r. The characters that
cannot be displayed are replaced by half-pitch spaces.
When the code containing no text data has been
scanned, the code is not correctly displayed.
pIf scanning is not completed in a certain period, the
scanning is suspended and the Scanning Code display
returns.
pWhen the scanned code is part of divided QR codes,
select âOKâ to repeat step 2 and step 3 for scanning the
rest of codes.
Camera
)Save resultOK
The scanned data is stored.
Scanned Code Result
display
Information
pYou cannot scan bar codes or 2-dimensional codes other
than JAN codes or QR codes.
pScanning may take a long time. Hold the FOMA phone
securely with your hands during scanning.
pYou may not be able to scan codes correctly depending on
scratch, dirt, damage, the quality of printed material, light
reflection, or QR code version.
pYou cannot scan some codes depending on the type or size.
Function Menu of the Scanned Code Result
Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
See page 147.
Display list
You can bring up the Bar Code Reader List
when one or more files are stored.
Internet
You can connect to the highlighted URL via
i-mode or Full Browser.
i-mode or Full BrowserYES
pYou can connect to the URL also by
highlighting the URL and pressing
Oo(
).
147
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Save result
Function menu
Compose
message
Camera
Dialing
Operation/Explanation
You can compose i-mode mail to send to the
highlighted mail address.
Go to step 3 on page 172.
pYou can compose i-mode mail also by
highlighting the mail address and pressing
Oo(
).
pWhen you select âCompose messageâ from
the Scanned Code Result display, the data
on the Scanned Code Result display is
entered into the address, subject, and text
field.
You can make a voice call, videophone call,
or PushTalk call to the highlighted phone
number.
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select âSelect imageâ, select an
image to send to the other party during the
videophone call.
pWhen you select âCompose SMSâ, you can
compose an SMS message to send to the
phone number set as the destination
address. Go to step 3 of âComposing SMS
Messages to Sendâ on page 206.
pYou can make a call also by highlighting the
).
phone number and pressing Oo(
Dial
pTo make an international call, select âIntâl
dial assistâ. (See page 58)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select âNotify
caller IDâ. (See step 2 on page 47)
Add to
phonebook
See page 87.
Add bookmark You can bookmark the site name and URL.
YES
pSelect âPage titleâ to edit the title.
OKSelect a destination folder.
Save image
You can save the scanned image data to set
to the Stand-by display or other displays.
Select a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 159.
pSee page 162 when images are stored to
the maximum.
Save melody You can save the scanned melody data to set
it as a ring tone or other tones.
YESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 2 on page 160.
pSelect â
â to play back the melody.
pSee page 162 when melodies are stored to
the maximum.
148
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Save ToruCa You can save the scanned ToruCa file.
Select a destination folder.
pSelect â
â to display the ToruCa file.
pSee page 162 when ToruCa files are stored
to maximum.
Start iÎąppli You can start up i-Îąppli from the scanned
data.
YES
Copy
Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying.
pYou can copy codes of up to 5,000 full-pitch/
10,000 half-pitch characters.
pSee page 361 for pasting copied characters.
Information
pURL can be displayed in up to 512 half-pitch characters by
Bar Code Reader and up to 256 half-pitch characters by
Text Reader.
pIf the scanned data contains nonenterable characters, you
cannot enter it as a mail address, and those characters may
become spaces in the text field.
pYou cannot make emergency calls by scanning â110â, â119â
or â118â.
pYou can display up to 512 half-pitch characters for a URL
and can store up to 256 characters from the beginning.
pThe file name and title for the saved image are âimageXXXâ
(XXX are numerals).
pThe file name for the saved melody is âmelodyXXXâ (XXX
are numerals).
pFor the melody with no title, the file name is displayed as the
title.
pWhen playing back the melody, it is played back at the
sound volume set for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ.
Display the Saved Data List
mLifeKitBar code readerSaved data
The titles for stored data are
displayed from the latest one.
pSelect a title to show the
Scanned Code Result display.
Bar Code Reader List
Information
pThe titles for the scanned data are as follows:
(Example) When the scanned data is saved at 10:00 on
November 15, 2007;
Title name: 20071115_1000_0000
When the focus is locked, a
confirmation tone sounds and the
guide frame becomes green.
pPress m to set the photo light
to âONâ or âOFFâ.
pPress Co to show the reduced
display, and press Vo to return
to the former display.
ăťIf you store multiple data items for the same date
and time, the lower four-digit numbers increase
up to â9999â.
Function Menu of the Bar Code Reader List
Function menu
Edit title
Operation/Explanation
Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch
characters.
You can bring up the Scanned Code Result
display for stored data.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Confirm the scanned result.
Using Text Reader
You can scan printed phone numbers, mail addresses
or alphanumeric characters such as URLs using the
outside camera, and store them as text information.
Use the text information to make calls, compose i-mode
mail, connect to the Internet, and so on.
â When scanning with Text Reader
pTake the character
strings as large as
possible within the
Guide frame
guide frame.
pAutofocus works when
you scan characters
about 10 cm or more
away from them. When
you scan characters in
the out-of-focus state, the
recognition rate lowers.
pScan the character string with the camera set in parallel.
Scan Text
At Text Reader start-up
The Text Reader menu is displayed.
pYou can paste the Text Reader menu to the desktop.
(See page 114)
The characters are scanned. (The shutter tone does not
sound.)
pTo cancel scanning, press r.
pWhen scanning is completed, the scanning completion
tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator lights. The
sound level is fixed and cannot be changed. However,
the tone does not sound in Manner Mode or while
âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ is set to âSilentâ.
The scanned characters
are underlined. Confirm
the scanned characters
Conversion
for mistakes.
candidate
pPress r to
Scanned
restart scanning.
result
pTo store the characters
without correcting, go
to step 7.
Scanned Text
Confirmation display
Press Mo to highlight a character to be
correctedPress the number of the
conversion candidate.
Press Oo(
i(
).
The scanned characters are set.
pTo link characters, repeat step 2 through step 6.
pTo release the set characters, press r.
)Store
The scanned characters are stored.
pWhen scanned text contains
âtelâ, â@â, or âhttp://â, you can
execute Phone To or Web To
Scanned Text Result
function by selecting the text.
display
(See page 163) You can select
only first item even if multiple items are found.
pPress l(
) to overwrite the scanned characters
and activate Text Reader. Go to step 2.
149
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
mLifeKitText readerScan text
).
pConversion candidates are displayed up to four kinds
for each character.
pWhen you want to correct the character to other than
the conversion candidate, highlight a character to be
), then enter a character
corrected and press l(
after switching to âAlphabet entry modeâ or âNumeric entry
modeâ. However you cannot enter characters such as
â.ne.jpâ or â.co.jpâ by pressing -a.
Photo light: OFF
Zoom: Magnified view
You can store eight scanned data files of up to 256
half-pitch characters per item.
The number of characters you can scan at a time is up
to 50 half-pitch characters, and you can scan the
increased characters in parts.
Scanning Text display
Press Oo(
Camera
Result
Fit the characters to be scanned to the guide
frame and press Xo.
Information
pHold the FOMA phone securely with your hands during
scanning so that you can scan characters correctly.
pCharacters you can scan are alphabet letters (uppercase
and lowercase), numerals, and symbols (#, &, (, ), -, ., /, :,
@, [, ], _, ~, ?, =, %, and +). You cannot scan kanji and
hiragana characters. You might not be able to scan those
correctly depending on the surroundings such as lighting.
pYou cannot scan handwritten characters correctly.
pYou might not be able to scan the following:
Characters received by a FAX/Copied characters/Designed
characters/Characters having no certain space between
characters/Characters difficult to identify from the
background.
Camera
Display the Saved Data List
mLifeKitText readerSaved data
Up to 22 half-pitch characters are
displayed for each stored data.
pSelect a data item to show the
Text Reader List
Scanned Text Result display.
pPress l(
) to compose i-mode mail to send to
the characters in the item set as a mail address. (See
step 3 on page 172)
Function Menu of the Scanning Text Display/
Scanned Text Confirmation Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
NEGA/POSI
mode
You can set this mode to fit to the printing
conditions of the character string you want to
At Text Reader scan.
start-up
Select an item.
Auto setting
Auto setting . . .Automatically recognizes
printing conditions.
Positive fix. . . . . Select this when deep color
characters are printed over
faint color ground.
Negative fix . . . .Select this when faint color
characters are printed over
deep color ground.
Function Menu of the Scanned Text Result
Display/Text Reader List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Edit
Edit the text.
Internet
See page 147.
Compose
message
You can compose i-mode mail to send to the
scanned mail address as a destination
address.
Go to step 3 on page 172.
Dialing
See page 148.
Store mail add. See page 87.
Store phone No. See page 87.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Store
See page 149.
Edit
You can edit and store the scanned character
string.
Edit the text.
Recognition
mode
You can set this mode according to the type
of the character string you want to scan.
At Text Reader Select an item.
start-up
Auto setting . . . Automatically recognizes
Auto setting
the type of characters.
URL . . . . . . . . . . Select this when you scan
a URL. âhttp://â or âhttps://â
is automatically entered to
the head of the character
string when it is stored.
Mail address . . . Select this when you scan
a mail address.
Phone number . . . Select this when you scan
a phone number.
Number . . . . . . . Select this when you scan
numerals.
Free character . . . Select this when you scan
alphabetic characters that
are not especially specified.
150
Add bookmark You can bookmark the URL you have
scanned.
OK
pSelect âPage titleâ to edit the title.
Select a destination folder.
Search
phonebook
You can search for Phonebook entries using
the scanned phone number or mail address.
Select a search methodBo
The Phonebook List that corresponds to the
phone number or mail address is displayed.
Display detail/ You can switch between the Scanned Text
Display list
Result display and Text Reader List.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
What is i-mode?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
Displaying Sites
Accessing Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšiMenuâş
152
How to View/to Operate Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
Displaying Most Recently Accessed Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšLast URLâş
155
Using My Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšMy Menuâş
156
Changing i-mode Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšChange i-mode Passwordâş
156
Displaying Internet Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšEnter URLâş
156
Bookmarking Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšBookmarkâş
157
Saving Site Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšScreen Memoâş
158
Downloading Images or Melodies from Sites
Downloading Files or Data Items from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
Convenient Functions of i-mode
Operations from Highlighted Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
Setting Functions of i-mode
Setting i-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âši-mode Settingsâş
164
Setting Connection Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšSet Connection Timeoutâş
164
Changing a Host from i-mode (ISP Connection Communication) . . . . . . . . . âšHost Selectionâş
165
Using Certificates
Operating SSL Certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšSSL Certificateâş
165
Setting FirstPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšClient Certificateâş
165
Changing a CA Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšCertificate Hostâş
167
Using i-motion
What is i-motion? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
Obtaining i-motion Movies from Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšObtain i-motion Movieâş
168
Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšimotion Auto-playâş
169
Using i-Channel
What is i-Channel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
Using i-Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
Setting How Ticker is Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšTicker ON/OFFâş
170
151
What is i-mode?
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
i-mode is the service that makes use of the display of
the FOMA phone supporting i-mode (i-mode phone) to
enable you to use online services such as site
(program) access, Internet access, and i-mode mail.
pi-mode is a pay service that is available on a subscription
basis.
pFor details on i-mode, refer to the âMobile Phone Userâs
Guide [i-mode]â.
â Before Using i-mode
pContents of sites (programs) and web pages (Internet web
pages) are generally protected by copyrights law. Data
such as text and images that you obtained to the i-mode
phone from sites (programs) and Internet web pages can
be used for personal entertainment but cannot be used in
whole or in part, as it is or after modification, for
commercial purposes or sent as e-mail attachments or
output from your i-mode phone to other devices, unless
you have permission from the copyright holders.
pIf you replace the UIM with another one or turn on the
power with the UIM not inserted, you cannot display/play
back files depending on the model, such as still images/
moving images/melodies obtained from sites, attached
files (still images/moving images/melodies and other files)
sent/received by mail, screen memos, or Messages R/F.
pWhen the file whose display and/or playback is restricted
by the UIM is set for the Stand-by display or specified ring
tone, the FOMA phone works with the default contents
when you replace the existing UIM with new one or turn on
the power with the UIM not inserted.
< iMenu>
Accessing Sites
You can use a variety of services offered by IPs
(Information Providers). From the display of the FOMA
phone, you can check your bank balance, reserve
tickets, and do similar tasks. (IPs offer different types
of services. Some of them need to be applied for
separately.)
iiMenu
i-mode menu
While you are online, â â blinks.
pâ â blinks while you are using the i-mode service
(during i-mode standby).
pTo cancel during the connection, select âCancelâ. To
cancel while obtaining a page, press l(
).
pTo end i-mode, press hand select YES while the
site is displayed. â â goes off and i-mode ends.
It may take longer to end i-mode.
Select an item (link).
Repeat selecting items (links) to display the desired site.
pYou can select underscored items on the displayed site.
When you select an item, it is highlighted.
pIf there is a number at the head of the item showing the
link, you can connect to that link directly by pressing the
numeric key corresponding to that number. (Some sites
cannot be connected.)
pWhile the site is displayed, press Bo to scroll through
line by line. Press m(
)/c(
to scroll through page by page.
152
) or >
â To obtain an SSL site (SSL pages)
The display on the right appears.
When obtaining is completed, the
SSL page appears and â â lights.
pTo cancel during authentication,
select âCancelâ. To cancel obtaining
the SSL page after authentication,
).
press l(
â To return to a non-SSL site
The display on the right appears.
Select âYESâ to display the ordinary
site; â â goes off.
Change to iMenu in English
The iMenu can be displayed in English.
iiMenuEnglish iMenu
iMenu in English will be displayed.
pTo change back to the Japanese
display, select âćĽćŹčŞ
(Japanese)â.
How to View/to Operate Sites
Basic operating methods while a site is displayed are
explained.
Return to Obtained Previous Page/Go
to Obtained Next Page
The FOMA phone saves the files such as the displayed
Internet web pages to a temporal storage area called a
cache. By pressing No, you can bring up the page
stored in the cache without communicating.
pWhen you bring up a page that exceeds the cache size on
the FOMA phone or a page that is configured (created) to
always read its latest information, the FOMA phone starts
communication.
pWhen i-mode ends, the cache is cleared.
Press Co to return to the previous page.
Press Vo to go to the next page.
Two pages before
One page before
Currently displayed page
+No
â To turn pages
You can move back up through the pages that you have
displayed so far by pressing Co repeatedly. However, if you
display a different page (âDâ) from the previous page (âBâ), you
cannot return to âCâ from âDâ even when you press Co twice.
Instead, the pages are displayed in the order of âDâ â âBâ â âAâ.
Co
Co
Information
pThe iMenu in English differs slightly from the iMenu in
Japanese.
pItems such as Tokusuru Menu and News are not shown on
the English iMenu.
pGenerally, âWhatâs Newâ site will be updated every other
Monday.
pEnglish sites are displayed after entering Menu List (sites
differ from Japanese version).
Co
âŚSequence of page display
âŚSequence when previous page from
the display âDâ has been displayed
Information
pWhen you display a page stored in cache, you cannot
display text or settings you entered when connected before.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the site behavior might
differ from the one for ordinary sites.
153
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Information
pDepending on the site, you may need to apply for the service
in writing separately, or to pay information fees to use it.
pThe maximum display size of the images on the site is in
1400 x 480 dots. If it is larger than 1400 x 480 dots, it is
displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained.
pDepending on the site, â
â might be displayed when the
image is not correctly displayed.
pDepending on the site or data, you might not be able to
download or save melodies, PDF files, software programs,
and others.
pWith some Internet web pages (sites) supporting i-mode, the
color setting might make the text difficult or impossible to see.
pWhen you are asked from the site to send information about
music you have played back on the FOMA phone, the
confirmation display appears for about sending your music
information. Select âYESâ to send the information (title names,
artist names, and played dates) of the music played back on the
FOMA phone. The sent music information is used for the IP
(information provider) to provide customized information to you.
Information
pAccess news from DoCoMo and usage regulations on
âWhatâs Newâ.
Select/Enter Information on Sites
In sites, you may use the displayed radio buttons,
check boxes, text boxes, and pull down menus.
Name
Display example
Operation/Explanation
Radio
button
ďźNot selected
ďźSelected
Radio buttons are for
selecting one from multiple
choices.
pSome Flash movies may vibrate the FOMA phone while
they are being played back. The FOMA phone vibrates
regardless of the setting of âVibratorâ.
Check
box
ďźNot selected
ďźSelected
Check boxes are for
selecting one or more items
from multiple choices.
pWhen you play back the Flash movie saved to the Data
Box, microSD memory card, or screen memo, it might look
different depending on the saving location.
pSome Flash movies might not work correctly.
Text box
Pull
down
menu
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Information
pThe effect tone and vibrator for the Flash movie set for the
Stand-by display do not work.
pThe effect tone for Flash movies does not sound during Play
Background.
You can enter characters.
Highlight a text box and
) to show
press Oo(
the Character Entry display.
You can select an item from
the option list. Highlight a
pull-down menu and press
Oo(
) to show the
option list.
pYou might be able to select
multiple items from
pull-down menus. Each
time you use Bo to
highlight an item and press
Oo(
), you can
select/release items
repeatedly. After selecting
).
items, press l(
Information
pSome sites show the authentication display to request your
user ID and password.
Enter your user ID and password, and then select âOKâ.
Flash Function
Flash is an animation technology using pictures and
sound. Flash movies make the sites more attractive.
You can download Flash movies to your FOMA phone
and play them back or set them for the Stand-by
display.
Information
pThe maximum display size of the Flash movies on the site is
in 700 x 480 dots. If it is larger than 700 x 480 dots, it is
displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained.
pSome Flash movies refer to the phone-information data in
your FOMA phone. To permit the use of the information in
your FOMA phone, set âUse phone informationâ to âYESâ.
(âYESâ is set at purchase.)
pEffect tones sound for some Flash movies. To silence them,
set âSound effect settingâ (or âSound effectâ) to âOFFâ.
154
pYou cannot save the Flash movies if an error occurs while
they are being played back.
pYou can operate some Flash movies by using +Mo or +Oo.
Flash movies can be operated sometimes even when
â
â is not displayed.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the behavior might differ
from ordinary sites.
Serial number of mobile phones/UIMs
When you select an item, the confirmation display
asking whether to send the serial number of mobile
phone/UIM might appear.
pThe âserial number of your mobile phone/UIMâ to be sent is
used by an identifying the user, providing customized
information, and for judging if the contents the IP
(Information Provider) offers are available on your mobile
phone.
pThe âserial number of your mobile phone/UIMâ is sent to the
IPs (Information Providers) over the Internet, so could be
deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age, and gender are not notified to the IPs
(Information Providers) or others, by this operation.
Function Menu while Site is Displayed
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
iMenu
You can return to âiMenuâ.
Bookmark
(Add
bookmark)
See page 157.
Bookmark
(Bookmark)
Bookmark
Go to step 1 of âDisplay Web Pages or Sites
from a Bookmarkâ on page 157.
Screen memo See page 158.
(Add screen
memo)
Screen memo Screen memo list
(Screen memo Go to step 2 on page 158.
list)
Function menu
Internet
(Enter URL)
Operation/Explanation
You can enter a URL to display an Internet
web page.
Enter URLSelect the text box
Go to step 2 of âDisplaying Internet Web
Pagesâ on page 156.
The URL of the displayed site is input
beforehand.
Internet
See page 262.
(Switch to FB)
The site contents will be updated with the
latest information.
Save image
See page 159.
Compose
message
You can paste or attach the URL of a
displayed site or screen memo, or images to
the text to compose i-mode mail.
Select an item.
Attach URL . . . . . . Pastes a URL to the text
of i-mode mail.
Attach image . . . . Select an image to attach
it to i-mode mail.
Insert dec. mail. . . Select an image to paste
it to Deco-mail.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
pSee page 175 for Deco-mail.
Add to
phonebook
See page 87.
Add desktop See page 114.
icon
Others
When characters are not correctly displayed,
(Change CHR you can convert them to the correct ones.
Change CHR code
code)
pThis setting is valid only for the site and
Internet web page being displayed.
pWhen characters are not correctly displayed, repeat the
operation. However, the previous character is displayed if
you repeat the operation four times.
pEven when you repeat this operation, the correct character
might not appear.
pIf you change the character code when the correct characters
are displayed, wrong characters might appear instead.
pUp to 128 half-pitch/64 full-pitch characters can be
displayed for a title.
< Last URL>
Displaying Most Recently
Accessed Site
Display Last URL
When you end i-mode, the URL of the page displayed
last is stored as âLast URLâ.
You can display the page you viewed last time by
selecting âLast URLâ from the i-mode menu.
iLast URL
Information
pSome pages cannot be stored as âLast URLâ, such as pages
whose URLs contain more than 2,048 half-pitch characters,
the Obtaining Completion display for melodies or i-motion
movies, etc. and FirstPass Center pages.
Others
(Title)
You can display the title of the displayed site.
Title
Others
(URL)
You can display the URL of the displayed site.
URL
You can initialize the URL of the page you viewed last
time to the iMenu URL.
Others
(Certificate)
You can check the subject name, author,
validity period and serial number of the
certificate used in SSL communication. Up to
five certificates are displayed.
Certificate
Others
(Set image
display)
See page 164.
Reset Last URL
ii-mode settingsReset last URL
YES
Others
See page 164.
(Sound effect)
Others
(Retry)
You can play back the animation or Flash
movie from the beginning.
Retry
155
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Reload
Information
pThe number of characters of the URL you can paste to the
text is up to 256 half-pitch characters. If the URL contains
256 half-pitch characters or more, you cannot paste it.
pYou may not be able to attach or paste some images to
i-mode mail.
< My Menu>
Using My Menu
If you register frequently used sites in My Menu, you
will be able to access them easily.
You can register up to 45 sites.
pEnter your own i-mode password.
Register Sites in My Menu
Bring up a page to be registered
Register My Menu
pThe page configuration differs depending on the site.
Select the i-mode password text box
Enter the i-mode passwordćąşĺŽ (OK)
pThe entered i-mode password is displayed as â_â.
pSee page 118 for the i-mode password.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Information
pSome sites cannot be registered in My Menu.
pWhen you subscribe to a pay site in ăĄăăĽăźďźć¤ç´˘(Menu/
Search) and Menu List, it will be registered in My Menu
automatically.
Information
pNote that if you do not remember the i-mode password, you
need to bring an identification card such as your driverâs
license to the handling counter of a DoCoMo shop.
< Enter URL>
Displaying Internet Web Pages
iiMenuEnglish iMenuMy Menu
Select a site to be accessed.
Information
pIf you are using Dual Network Service, you might not be
able to use My Menu registered by the mova phone using
the FOMA phone, or My Menu registered by the FOMA
phone using the mova phone.
< Change i-mode Password>
Changing i-mode Password
The i-mode password (four digits) is required to
subscribe to and unsubscribe from message services
and i-mode pay sites, and to do i-mode mail settings.
Be sure not to let others know your i-mode password.
iiMenuEnglish iMenuOptions
Change i-mode Password
Select the âCurrent Passwordâ text box
Enter the i-mode password (four digits).
pIf you enter the i-mode password for the first time, enter
â0000â (four zeros) which is set at a time of your
contract.
pThe entered numeral is displayed as â_â.
156
Select the âNew Password (Confirmation)â
text boxEnter the new i-mode password
(four digits)Select
pEnter the same number that you entered in step 2.
Access Sites from My Menu
Select the âNew Passwordâ text box
Enter a new i-mode password (four digits).
iGo to location
Enter a URLOK
pYou can enter up to 256 half-pitch alphanumeric
characters and symbols (up to 512 half-pitch characters
for Full Browser).
pFor Full Browser, the confirmation display appears
telling that the web page might not be displayed.
Information
pFor i-mode, Internet web pages not supporting i-mode or
some type of internet web pages to be connected might not
be displayed correctly.
pWhen the file size of the page you have received exceeds
the maximum obtainable size of a page, receiving is
suspended. The data obtained so far might be displayable
by selecting âOKâ.
Displaying Web Pages from URL History
Up to 10 entered URLs can be stored in URL History.
iGo to location
Select a URL to be displayedOK
pExcluding âhttp://â and âhttps://â,
up to 22 half-pitch characters
can be displayed.
pYou can edit the URL by
selecting the URLâs text box.
URL History List
Information
pWhen the entered URLs exceed 10 items, the URL histories
are overwritten automatically, starting from the oldest one.
Information
pWhen you newly enter a URL to access a site, that URL is
saved as a different record even if you access the same
URL.
Display Web Pages or Sites from a
Bookmark
iBookmarkSelect a folder
Select a bookmark to be displayed.
Function Menu of the URL History List
Function menu
Compose
message
Operation/Explanation
You can paste the highlighted URL to the text
of i-mode mail and compose it.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
pYou can compose i-mode mail also by
).
pressing l(
Add desktop See page 114.
icon
Set as home
URL
Delete
Delete (Delete this)YES
[Delete
(Delete this)]
Delete
(Delete
selected)
Delete selectedPut a check mark for
URL histories to be deletedl(
YES
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security
CodeYES
< Bookmark>
Bookmarking Web Pages or
Sites for Quick Access
Add Bookmark
Once you bookmark a frequently accessed site, you
can display the page directly. You can register 100
bookmarks each for i-mode and Full Browser.
From the page to be registered
i(
)BookmarkAdd bookmark
YESSelect a destination folder.
Function Menu of the Bookmark Folder List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Operate folder You can add a new folder.
(Add folder) You can add up to nine folders in addition to
each âBookmarkâ folder/âScreen memoâ folder.
Add folderEnter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters.
Operate folder Edit folder nameEdit the folder name.
(Edit folder
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
name)
half-pitch characters.
Operate folder You can delete the folder and all bookmarks
(Delete folder) and screen memos in the folder. You cannot
delete the âBookmarkâ folder/âScreen memoâ
folder.
Delete folderEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES
Ir/
See page 305.
transmission
(Send all Ir data)
Ir/
See page 307.
transmission
(All
transmission)
No. of
bookmarks
You can check the number of bookmarks
stored in all folders.
Delete all
The folders will not be deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Function Menu of the Bookmark List
Function menu
Compose
message
Operation/Explanation
You can paste the highlighted URL to the text
of i-mode mail and compose it.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
pYou can compose i-mode mail also by
pressing l(
).
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Information
pURLs containing up to 256 half-pitch characters can be
registered (up to 512 half-pitch characters for Full Browser).
URLs longer than this cannot be registered.
pUp to 12 full-pitch/24 half-pitch characters are stored for a
title. For longer titles, the excess characters are deleted. If
no title is entered, the URL without âhttp://â or âhttps://â is
registered.
pThe contents entered in the site are not saved to the
bookmark.
Bookmark List
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
You can store the site as Home URL of Full
Browser.
YES
pYou can operate this only from the URL
History List of Full Browser.
Bookmark Folder List
pAfter you use a bookmark to display a page, that
bookmark will be displayed at the top of the Bookmark
List.
pSome pages cannot be bookmarked.
157
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Attach to mail You can send i-mode mail with the bookmark
attached.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
Move
You can move bookmarks or screen memos
to another folder.
Select a destination folderPut a check
mark for bookmarks or screen memos to
)YES
be movedl(
Edit title
Edit the title.
pFor Bookmark, you can edit the title also
pressing m(
) on the listing display
or detailed display.
pYou can enter up to 12 full-pitch/24
half-pitch characters for a bookmark. If you
) with a blank, the URL
press Oo(
without âhttp://â or âhttps://â is registered.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22
half-pitch characters for a screen memo. If
) with a blank, the
you press Oo(
screen memo is registered as âNo titleâ.
Copy
(Copy URL)
You can copy the URL of the bookmark.
Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying.
pSee page 361 for how to paste copied characters.
Copy
(Copy to
microSD)
See page 295.
Set as home
URL
You can store the site as Home URL of Full Browser.
YES
pYou can operate this only from the
Bookmark List of Full Browser.
Add desktop See page 114.
icon
Ir/
See page 305.
transmission
(Send Ir data)
Ir/
See page 306.
transmission
transmission)
No. of
bookmarks
You can display the number of bookmarks
stored in the displayed folder.
Delete
Delete (Delete this)YES
[Delete
(Delete this)]
Delete
(Delete
selected)
Delete selectedPut a check mark for
bookmarks or screen memos to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete
(Delete all)
You can delete all bookmarks or screen
memos stored in the folder.
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security
CodeYES
158
< Screen Memo>
Saving Site Contents
Save as a Screen Memo
You can save a displayed page as a screen memo to
the FOMA phone. You can display the page saved as a
screen memo without connecting to i-mode.
You can save up to 100 screen memos, however, the
number of screen memos you can save decreases
depending on the data volume.
From a page to be savedi(
Screen memoAdd screen memoYES
Select a destination folder.
pSee page 162 when screen memos are stored to the
maximum.
Information
pUp to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters are stored for a
title. For longer titles, the excess characters are deleted.
pIf you save the Obtaining Completion display, its data file is saved
as well. (The Obtaining Completion display for Chaku-uta FullÂŽ
music files, for i-motion movies with playable deadline, or for the
ToruCa files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited
cannot be saved.) Some Obtaining Completion displays cannot be
saved as screen memos. The display except the Obtaining
Completion display is saved with a URL of that page of up to 256
half-pitch characters.
pWhen you save SSL pages, their SSL certificates are saved
as well.
pThe contents entered in the text box, or selected with the
pull-down menu, check box, or radio button are not saved to
screen memos.
pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per page. However, you can
save up to 500 Kbytes of the i-motion Obtaining Completion
display, up to 200 Kbytes of the Template Obtaining
Completion display, up to 1 Kbyte of the ToruCa Obtaining
Completion display, and up to 20 Kbytes of the Download
Dictionary Obtaining Completion display.
Display a Screen Memo
iScreen memo
Select a folderSelect a screen memo.
Screen Memo Folder List
Screen Memo List
Detailed Screen Memo
display
pUse No to check other screen memos.
Information
pThe page saved as a screen memo has the information at
the time it was saved. This might differ from the latest
information on the site.
Function Menu of the Screen Memo Folder List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Operate folder See page 157.
(Add folder)
Operate folder See page 157.
(Edit folder
name)
Operate folder See page 157.
(Delete folder)
Security ON/
OFF
No. of memos You can display the number of stored screen
memos and protected screen memos in all folders.
Delete all
You can delete all screen memos. The folders
will not be deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Function Menu of the Screen Memo List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Move
See page 158.
Edit title
See page 158.
Protect ON/
OFF
You can protect screen memos not to be
deleted. You can protect up to 50 screen
memos, however, the number of screen
memos you can protect decreases depending
on the data volume.
Protected items are indicated by â
â.
pTo release protection, perform the same
operation.
No. of memos You can display the number of stored screen
memos and protected screen memos in the
displayed folder.
Delete
(Delete)
See page 158.
Delete
(Delete
selected)
See page 158.
Delete
(Delete all)
See page 158.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Compose
message
You can compose i-mode mail also by
pressing l(
). (See page 155)
Edit title
See page 158.
Protect ON/
OFF
See page 159.
Save image
See page 159.
Add to
phonebook
See page 87.
Others
(URL)
You can display the URL of the screen memo.
URL
Others
(Certificate)
See page 155.
Others
See page 164.
(Sound effect)
Others
(Retry)
You can play back the animation or Flash
movie from the beginning.
Retry
Delete
YES
Downloading Files or Data Items
from Sites
You can download the files such as images and
melodies from sites and save them to the FOMA phone.
You can save some files directly to the microSD
memory card.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
You can set the folder to open only when you
enter your Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
The folder changes to â
â.
pTo release it, perform the same operation.
Function Menu of the Detailed Screen Memo Display
Download Image
You can save the image displayed on a site or screen
memo, and then set it as the Stand-by display, Wake-up
display, or another display. You can save images,
frames and marks for Deco-mail as well. You can save
up to 3,500 files in total including other data files,
however, the number of files you can save decreases
depending on the data volume. (See page 444)
From a site display/Detailed Screen Memo
displayi(
)Save image
Save image or Save BG image
pWhen you save an image, select it.
YESSelect a destination folder.
pSee page 162 when images are stored to the maximum.
To set it as a display, select âYESâ.
Go to âSet displayâ on page 274.
159
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Information
pUp to 36 half-pitch characters are saved for a file name.
When the file name is not specified, a part of the
downloaded URL or âimagexxxâ (xxx denotes numerals) is
saved as the file name.
Information
pEven when an image is displayed on the site, it might not be
displayed on the Picture viewer after saving it to the FOMA
phone.
pThe image satisfying the following conditions is saved as a
Decomail-pictograph:
ăťGIF or JPEG image
ăťImage of 20 x 20 dots
ăťImage without file restrictions
ăťImage of 6 Kbytes or less
Information
pUp to 36 half-pitch characters are saved for a file name.
When the file name is not specified, a part of the
downloaded URL or âmelodyxxxâ (xxx denotes numerals) is
saved as the file name.
pUntitled melodies are indicated by âNo titleâ on the
Obtaining Completion display or list.
pThe image satisfying the following conditions is saved as a
frame or a mark:
ăťTransparent GIF (except animation GIF)
ăťThe extension is âifmâ.
ăťImage of Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller
Images of Stand-by (480 x 854), VGA (640 x 480),
CIF (352 x 288), QVGA (240 x 320), QCIF (176 x 144),
You can download PDF files from sites for display. You
can save up to 3,500 files in total including other data
files, however, the number of files you can save
decreases depending on the data volume. (See
page 444)
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96ďźare saved as frames, and others
are saved as marks.
pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per image via i-mode, or
500 Kbytes per image via Full Browser.
pFor Full Browser, you cannot save some images. You can
save images in BMP format and PNG format only to the
microSD memory card.
Download Melody
You can download melodies and set them as a ring
tone and other tones. You can save up to 3,500 files in
total including other data files, however, the number of
files you can save decreases depending on the data
volume. (See page 444)
Bring up a melody downloadable site
Select a melodySaveYES
Select a destination folder.
pSee page 290 for operations while
a melody is being played back.
pSelect âPropertyâ to display the
melody information. (See
page 291)
pSee page 162 when melodies
are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 158 to save a screen
memo.
Obtaining Completion
display
Select âYESâ to set the downloaded melody as
a ring toneSelect an incoming type.
Information
pFor some melodies, the play part might have been
specified. If you set the play-part-specified melody for a ring
tone, it is played back according to the setting of âPosition to
playâ of âMelody effectâ.
pSome downloaded melodies might not be played back
successfully.
160
pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per melody.
Download PDF File
Bring up a PDF file downloadable site
Select a PDF file.
pWith the PDF file that cannot be displayed unless you
download all pages, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to download all pages. Select âYESâ to
select the destination folder.
pIf you have not downloaded all pages, you can
additionally download the remaining pages by using
âDownload remainâ.
pSee page 310 for how to save the displayed PDF file to
the FOMA phone. You can save the PDF file containing
pages that have not been downloaded or the PDF file of
which download was suspended midway as well.
pThe password entry display might be displayed
depending on the PDF file. Enter the password, and
then select âOKâ.
pSee page 307 for operations while PDF file is displayed.
Information
pThe file size of the PDF file you can download from i-mode
sites is up to 2 Mbytes. You cannot download the PDF file in
excess of 2 Mbytes.
pYou might be able to display the failed-to-download PDF file
by re-downloading.
Download Kisekae Tool File
You can download Kisekae Tool files from the site to
change the ring tone, Stand-by display, icons, and
others at a time. You can save up to 3,500 files in total
including other data files, however, the number of files
you can save decreases depending on the data volume.
(See page 444)
pYou can download the pre-installed Kisekae Tool files from
the âP-SQUAREâ site. (See page 163)
Bring up a Kisekae Tool downloadable site
Select a Kisekae Tool fileSave
YESPhone or microSD
â When downloading Kisekae Tool file is suspended
When you press l(
) to suspend downloading or when
downloading is suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to resume downloading.
Select âYESâ to resume downloading the remaining part. Select
âNOâ to show the Obtaining Completion display. When you
select âSave pt.â, select âPhoneâ or âmicroSDâ to save.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from
âKisekae Toolâ in âData boxâ.
Information
pYou can save up to 2,078 Kbytes per Kisekae Tool file.
You can download templates for Deco-mail from sites.
You can save up to 100 templates including the
pre-installed ones, however, the number of templates
you can save decreases depending on the data volume.
pYou can download the pre-installed templates from the
âP-SQUAREâ site. (See page 163)
Bring up a template downloadable site
Select a templateSaveYES
pSelect âPropertyâ to display the
information about the template.
(See page 179)
pSee page 178 for how to check
the stored template.
pSee page 162 when templates
are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 158 to save a screen
memo.
Obtaining Completion
display
Information
pWhen no decoration is set for the template, you cannot save
it.
pWhen a file is attached to the template, that file is deleted.
pWhen the image whose output from the FOMA phone is
prohibited is inserted, the inserted image is deleted when
saving. When the inserted image is deleted and thus no
decoration is found, you cannot save the template.
pThe title of the downloaded template takes the name of
âYYYY/MM/DD hh:mmâ. (Y: year, M: month, D: date, h:
hour, m: minute)
pYou can download up to 200 Kbytes per template file, but
when the number of characters used for the mail text
exceeds 5,000 full-pitch characters or 10,000 half-pitch
characters, or when the total of the image size inserted
exceeds 90 Kbytes, you cannot save that template file.
Download ToruCa File
You can download ToruCa files from sites. You can save
up to 3,500 files in total including other data files,
however, the number of files you can save decreases
depending on the data volume. (See page 444)
Bring up a ToruCa file downloadable site
Select a ToruCa fileSaveYES
Select a destination folder.
pSelect âDisplayâ to preview the
ToruCa file. You can save the
ToruCa file also by pressing
Oo(
) while it is previewed.
pSee page 162 when ToruCa files
are stored to the maximum.
Obtaining Completion
pPress i(
) and select
display
âAdd screen memoâ to save the
display as a screen memo. (See page 158)
161
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
pWhen you save a Kisekae Tool
file to your FOMA phone, a
confirmation display appears
asking whether to set the
Kisekae Tool file at a time.
pSelect âPropertyâ to display the
Kisekae Tool information. (See
Obtaining Completion
page 292)
display
pSee page 162 when Kisekae
Tool files are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 158 to save a screen memo.
Download Template
Download Dictionary
Search by i-mode
You can download dictionaries from sites. You can save
up to 10 dictionaries including the pre-installed ones.
pYou can download the pre-installed dictionaries from the
âP-SQUAREâ site. (See page 163)
Bring up a dictionary downloadable site
Select a dictionarySaveYES
pSelect âPropertyâ to display the
information about the dictionary.
(See page 362)
pSee page 158 to save a screen
memo.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
To set it as a dictionary file,
select âYESâ.
Information
pYou can save up to 20 Kbytes per dictionary.
pDepending on the site, you might not be able to download
dictionaries.
Download Chara-den Images
You can download Chara-den images from sites.
You can save up to three Chara-den images including
the pre-installed ones.
pYou can download the pre-installed chara-den images from
the âP-SQUAREâ site. (See page 163)
Bring up a Chara-den image downloadable site
Select a Chara-den imageSaveYES
pSelect âPropertyâ to display the
information about the Chara-den
image. (See page 288)
pSee page 162 when Chara-den
images are stored to the
maximum.
pSee page 158 to save a screen
memo.
Each selection displaySearch by i-mode
YESSelect a file.
Information
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
pSee page 361 for how to operate the downloaded
dictionary.
pThe way of downloading differs depending on the file.
Obtaining Completion
display
You can look for your favorite files on the site and
download them.
The number of files you can save differs depending on
the files you download.
You cannot change the site.
Obtaining Completion
display
Information
pYou can save up to 100 Kbytes per Chara-den image.
â When the data files are stored to the maximum
If the maximum number of data files is stored or there is not
enough memory when you try to save the data files, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the
unnecessary file and save new one.
pPerform this operation to save the following data:
ăťImages
ăťi-motion movies ăťMelodies
ăťChara-den images ăťPrograms
ăťChaku-uta FullÂŽ music files
ăťPDF files
ăťi-Îąppli
ăťToruCa files
ăťTemplates
ăťScreen memos
ăťKisekae Tool files
1. YESPut a check mark for data files to be deleted
l(
)YES
As the data files except Chara-den images, templates, and
screen memos are stored to the same storage area, you can
select other files when deleting files. Select a folder and put
a check mark for the files to be deleted. â
â appears
when you put it for the files whose amount of data is equal to
memory shortage.
pWhen selecting a file in âMUSICâ, you can show the lower
level folders by pressing l(
).
pEach time you press r, the upper level folder returns.
pFor programs, as a program has a large data volume, you
need to delete many files when you delete other files.
pIf the maximum number of files are stored when you
execute âMove programâ, or when you try to save i-Îąppli
program or ToruCa file, you need to select a same type of
file as the one you want to save.
pIf there is a security-applied folder for screen memos, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to enable you
to select screen memos in that security-applied folder.
When you select âYESâ, you need to enter your Terminal
Security Code.
pThe file set for another function is indicated by ââ
â.
pSee page 214 for deleting mail-linked i-Îąppli.
pIf you operate this when moving an i-Îąppli program from
microSD memory card to the FOMA phone, you cannot
delete the i-Îąppli program with its data file on the IC card.
162
â About âP-SQUAREâ
You can download the pre-installed
Kisekae Tool files, templates, dictionaries,
and Chara-den images from the
âP-SQUAREâ site (Japanese only).
QR code for
iMenu â ăĄăăĽăźďźć¤ç´˘ (Menu/Search)
accessing the site
â ăąăźăżă¤éťčŠąăĄăźăŤăź (Mobile Phone
Maker) â P-SQUARE
Operations from Highlighted
Information
Phone To/AV Phone To Function
You can make voice calls, videophone calls or
PushTalk calls by using phone numbers or similar
information displayed on sites and in mail.
pThe Phone To function to make a videophone call is called
the AV Phone To function.
Select a phone number or similar information
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select âSelect imageâ, select an image to be
sent to other party during a videophone call.
pSelect âSMSâ to compose an SMS message to send to
the phone number set as the destination address. Go to
step 3 of âComposing SMS Messages to Sendâ on
page 206.
pThe choices for dialing types may not be displayed
when the phone number is prefixed by âtel:â or âtel-av:â.
Go to step 2.
Dial
pTo make an international call, select âIntâl dial assistâ.
(See page 58)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select âNotify caller IDâ.
(See step 2 on page 47)
Information
pYou cannot make a call in Horizontal Open Style.
You can send mail by using mail addresses or similar
information displayed on sites and in mail.
Select a mail address or similar information.
The destination mail address is already entered in the
address field.
Go to step 3 on page 172.
Web To Function
You can access Internet web pages, via i-mode or Full
Browser, from URL or similar information displayed on
sites or in mail.
Select a URL or similar information
i-mode or Full BrowserYES
pWhen the URL or similar one contains the information of
i-mode or Full Browser, you are connected via the
function which corresponds to the information.
pTo cancel during connection, select âCancelâ. To cancel
).
while obtaining a page, press l(
i-Îąppli To Function
You can start i-Îąppli programs from URLs (links)
displayed on sites and in mail.
Select i-Îąppli informationYES
i-Îąppli starts.
Information
pEven if i-mode mail text contains a link to start an i-Îąppli
program, you cannot quote the link when forwarding or
replying to. Also, you cannot quote it when using DoCoMo
keitai datalink or infrared data exchange function.
Media To Function
You can start One Seg, book programs, or set timer
recordings from the information (links) displayed on
sites and in mail.
Select One Seg informationYES
One Seg program or the program booking/timer recording
starts.
pWhen the program booking/timer recording function
starts, press l(
) to book a program or set
timer recording.
To change contents you want to book/set, go to step 1
of âBook Programâ on page 253 or step 1 of âTimer
Recordingâ on page 253.
Information
pYou may not be able to use the Media To function even if
information is highlighted.
163
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
You can easily make a call, send mail, display Internet
web pages, start One Seg, book programs, and set
timer recordings using highlighted information (phone
numbers, mail addresses, URLs, melodies, images, and
so on) displayed on sites and in mail.
pThe Web To, Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, i-Îąppli To,
Media To and Address Link functions might not be available
depending on the mail sent from a personal computer or the
site.
pYou might be able to use the Web To, Phone To/AV Phone
To, Mail To, or i-Îąppli To function using highlighted
information other than a phone number, mail address or
URL.
pIn B Mode of 2in1, the Mail To function is not available.
Mail To Function
Item
Address Link Function
You can bring up a map from the postal address shown
in a site or others or can use the location information
on the GPS compatible i-Îąppli program. You can send
the location information by i-mode mail as well.
Select the location information such as
postal addressSelect an item.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Run iÎąppli . . . . Selects and starts a GPS compatible
i-Îąppli program.
Read a map . . . . Connects to the map site and displays
a map.
Paste to mail . . . Converts the location information into a
URL and compose i-mode mail with the
URL pasted in the text.
Location info (Check loc. info)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the details of the selected
location information.
< i-mode Settings>
Setting i-mode
ii-mode settings
Do the following operations.
Item
Scroll
You can set the number of lines that are
scrolled for when you use Bo while
displaying a site or screen memo.
Select the number of lines.
You can set whether to display images or
Flash movies included on sites or in screen
memos.
ON or OFF
Set connection See page 164.
timeout
Host selection See page 165.
imotion
auto-play
See page 169.
Use phone
information
To display a Flash movie while a site or
screen memo is displayed, the information in
the FOMA phone may be used. You can
select whether to permit the information to be
used for that case.
YES or NO
Sound effect You can set whether to make an effect tone
setting
sound for when you display a Flash movie
while a site or screen memo is displayed.
ON or OFF
Doc. display
settings
See page 310.
i-mode arrival See page 82.
act
164
Check
settings
You can check each of âi-mode settingsâ.
Reset last
URL
See page 155.
Information
pEven when âONâ is set, images might not be displayed
correctly. In this case, â
â is displayed.
pWhen âOFFâ is set, â
â is displayed and the data file is not
received.
pIf you change this setting, âSet image displayâ of âUser
settingsâ of One Seg is also changed.
pThe available information is as follows:
ăťDate and time set by âSet timeâ
ăťReception level of radio waves
ăťBattery level
ăťSound volume set by âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ
ăťLanguage selected by âSelect languageâ
ăťModel name and serial number of FOMA phone
pEven when âONâ is set, the effect tones may not sound
depending on Flash movies.
Operation/Explanation
Character size See page 115.
Set image
display
Operation/Explanation
< Set Connection Timeout>
Setting Connection Timeout
It may take long to obtain some sites. You can set the
time to wait before canceling obtaining. Obtaining is
not canceled automatically when âUnlimitedâ is set.
ii-mode settings
Set connection timeoutSelect a timeout.
Information
pEven when you have set âUnlimitedâ, you may be
disconnected owing to radio wave conditions.
Item
+m-8-1
< Host Selection>
Valid/Invalid
Changing a Host from i-mode
(ISP Connection Communication)
âťNormally, you do not need to change this setting.
You can set the host (APN) to use for receiving services
other than i-mode (DoCoMo).
If you change this setting, you will not be able to use i-mode.
ii-mode settingsHost selection
Highlight and press
l(
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to the
selected one.
pTo delete the stored host, press i(
), select
âDeleteâ, enter your Terminal Security Code, and then
select âYESâ.
Do the following operations.
Item
Host name
Operation/Explanation
Enter a host name.
pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch
characters.
Host address Enter a host address.
pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch
alphanumeric characters.
Host address 2 Enter a host address 2.
pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch
alphanumeric characters.
Press l(
â Certificates used for SSL communication
Certificate
. . . Certificates issued by the authenticating company and
stored in the FOMA phone at purchase.
DoCoMo Certificate
. . . Certificates required for connecting to the FirstPass
Center or FirstPass sites; they are stored on the UIM
(green/white).
User Certificate
. . . Certificates downloaded from the FirstPass Center by
selecting âClient certificateâ from the i-mode menu; they
are stored on the UIM (green/white).
< Client Certificate>
Host number Enter a host number.
pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch
alphanumeric characters.
The selected item is invalidated; then â
â
changes to â
â.
pWhen you select an invalid certificate, it will
be validated.
pIf you set a certificate to invalid, you cannot
display the sites with that SSL certificate.
pYou cannot set âDoCoMo Cert2â to âInvalidâ.
).
Information
pIf you set any other host than i-mode, âPake-Houdaiâ or
âPake-Houdai Fullâ are not applied.
< SSL Certificate>
Setting FirstPass
User certificates verify that you have subscribed to the
FOMA service. Downloaded user certificates are stored
on the UIM for the use on FirstPass sites. When you
cannot display a FirstPass site because the user
certificate on the UIM has expired or the required user
certificate is not stored on the UIM, you can request the
issue and download the user certificate from the
FirstPass Center.
pYou can request and download user certificates from the
FirstPass Center.
pThis function is not available with the blue UIM.
pThe display and operating method displayed in the FirstPass
Center site are subject to change.
pTo show FirstPass sites, you can use Full Browser as well.
pYou cannot send/receive mail or receive Messages R/F while
connected to the FirstPass Center.
pSet the date and time using âSet timeâ beforehand to connect
to the FirstPass Center.
pThis function is not available overseas.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Operation/Explanation
Operating SSL Certificates
iOperate certificateCertificate
Highlight a certificate and press i(
Do the following operations.
Item
Certificate
Operation/Explanation
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
The subject name, author, validity period, and
serial number of the certificate are displayed.
pYou can check the certificate also by pressing
Oo(
)instead of i(
).
165
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
â Client Authentication
pWith the FOMA phone, server authentication and client
authentication are performed for safer data exchange. The
site and your FOMA phone exchange certificate, check the
other partyâs certificate and verify each other for safer
communication service. By getting client authentication,
you can enjoy more secure communication services.
pClient authentication is available via the Internet
communication from the FOMA phone or via the Internet
communication with the FOMA phone connected to a
personal computer. To use the personal computer for the
client authentication, you need to install the FirstPass PC
software from the provided CD-ROM.
For details, refer to âFirstPassManual (PDF format)â in the
âFirstPassPCsoftâ folder on the CD-ROM. AdobeÂŽ
ReaderÂŽ (version 6.0 or higher is recommended) is
required to see âFirstPassManual (PDF format)â. If it is not
installed in your personal computer, install AdobeÂŽ
ReaderÂŽ from the provided CD-ROM to see it.
For details such as how to use it, refer to AdobeÂŽ ReaderÂŽ
Help.
Request Issue of User Certificate for
Download
You need to request the issue of the user certificate
before you download it. When requesting the issue of
your user certificate is completed, download the user
certificate. After the downloading is completed, it is
saved on the UIM and the FirstPass sites will be
displayable.
pFor an update, the message
âUpdating user certificateâ is
displayed.
pWhen you have already
requested the issue of the user
certificate, select âDownloadâ from the site display for
the FirstPass Center, go to step 3.
Enter your PIN2 code.
DownloadContinue
Access FirstPass Center
You can perform user certificate operations on the site
of the FirstPass Center site.
iOperate certificateClient certificate
English
Site display for the FirstPass Center
Request your certificateContinue
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60
seconds. When the code is not
entered within 60 seconds, the
connection is cut off as an error
entry.
pSee page 118 for PIN2 code.
pIf you do not download the user certificate immediately,
select âMenuâ. From the confirmation display asking
whether to close the SSL page, select âYESâto return to
the site display for the FirstPass Center.
Information
pBefore downloading a new or an updated certificate, be
sure to request the user certificate to be issued. User
certificates cannot be downloaded until the request for issue
has been made.
Site display for
the FirstPass Center
Information
pBefore using the FirstPass Center, select âThe usage
regulation (Japanese only)â and carefully read the
regulation.
pYou are not charged a packet communication fee for
connecting to the FirstPass Center.
166
Access Sites with User Certificate
You can connect to FirstPass sites with your user
certificate.
Bring up a FirstPass siteSelect an item
YES
Enter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the
code is not entered within 60 seconds, the connection is
cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 118 for PIN2 code.
Information
pIf you try to connect to the FirstPass site without the user
certificate or when its available period is expired, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to continue
connecting to the site. Select âNOâto return to the previous
page. Download or update the user certificate from the
FirstPass Center site and then access the site again.
pThe packet communication fee for accessing the FirstPass
site is included in Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai Full.
Request Revocation of User Certificate
You can revoke the downloaded user certificate.
Site display of the FirstPass Center
Other settingsRevoke your certificate
YESEnter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the
code is not entered within 60 seconds, the connection is
cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 118 for PIN2 code.
ContinueContinueContinue
Press l(
).
â Before Using FirstPass
pFirstPass is DoCoMoâs electronic certification service. By
using FirstPass, client authentication is enabled, whereby
the site and your FOMA phone exchange certificates,
check the other partyâs certificate and perform mutual
authentication.
pWhen requesting issue of a user certificate, carefully read
âThe usage regulation (Japanese only)â on the display,
agree to this, and then make the request.
pYou need to enter the PIN2 code to use the user
certificate. Once you have entered your PIN2 code, all
subsequent operations will be deemed to be done by you,
so be careful not to let anyone else use your UIM or PIN2
code.
pIf your UIM is lost or stolen, âDoCoMo Information Centerâ
on the back page of this manual can revoke your user
certificate.
pDoCoMo bears no obligation or responsibility with regard
to the sites and information provided by FirstPass sites.
Please solve the problem between you and FirstPass sites.
pDoCoMo and the CA do not guarantee security when you
use FirstPass and SSL, so you should use them on your
own judgment and responsibility.
Information
pTo use FirstPass after revoking a certificate, you need to apply
again for your user certificate to be issued and then download it.
pSee page 165 for how to view the download user certificate.
< Certificate Host>
Changing a CA Center
âťNormally, you do not need to change this setting.
You can set the host for downloading the user certificate.
iOperate certificateCertificate host
Highlight and press
l(
).
pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that host.
pTo delete the stored host, press i(
), select âDeleteâ,
enter your Terminal Security Code, and then select âYESâ.
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Do the following operations.
Item
Default URL
Operation/Explanation
Enter a default URL.
pYou can enter up to 100 half-pitch
alphanumeric characters.
Host address Enter a host address.
pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch
alphanumeric characters.
167
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
What is i-motion?
i-motion movies are composed of video, sound and
music, and you can play them back obtaining from
i-motion compatible sites into your FOMA phone. You
can set the i-motion movie for a ring tone.
Two types of i-motion movies are available as shown
below. The type of the obtained i-motion movie differs
depending on the site or file.
You can save up to 10 Mbytes per i-motion movie.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Categories
Type
Playback
type
Standard
Plays back
(normal)
after
type
obtaining
(can be
Plays back
saved)
while
obtaining
Streaming
type
(cannot be
saved)
Plays back
while
obtaining
Description
Plays back after obtaining all
the data of an i-motion movie.
Plays back while obtaining an
i-motion movie. After
obtaining, you can play it back
in the same way as âPlays
back after obtainingâ.
Plays back while obtaining an
i-motion movie. The data is
deleted after playback, so you
cannot play it back again or
save it to the FOMA phone.
< Obtain i-motion Movie>
Obtaining i-motion Movies from
Sites
Play Back an i-motion Movie Obtained
from a Site
Select an i-motion movie from an i-motion
obtainable sitePlay
See page 281 for the operation
during playback.
pIf an i-motion movie can be
played back during obtaining, it
will be played back during
obtaining.
pIf âimotion auto-playâ is set to
Obtaining Completion
âONâ, the i-motion movie will be
display
played back automatically after it
is obtained.
pSelect âPropertyâ to display the i-motion information.
(See page 282)
pSee page 158 to save a screen memo.
Information
pDepending on the accessed site or an i-motion movie, you
might not be able to obtain the data or play it back during
obtaining, or play it back after obtaining. Also, you cannot
obtain an i-motion movie in ASF format.
168
Information
pSee page 281 for the file formats of playable i-motion
movies.
pEven when you stop playing back the data of standard
(normal) type while obtaining, obtaining still continues.
pEven if âimotion auto-playâ is set to âONâ, the data is not
automatically played back after obtaining when it is played
back while obtaining.
pFor an i-motion movie that has restrictions on the number of
playbacks, playable period, or playable deadline, â â is
displayed at the head of the title. An i-motion movie with the
playable period restricted cannot be played back before or
after the restriction period. If you remove the battery and
keep it aside for a long time, the date/time information in
your FOMA phone might be reset. In that case, you cannot
play back the i-motion movie that has restrictions on the
playable period and playable deadline. See page 282 for
checking the playback restrictions.
pDepending on the line speed, line state, or radio wave
conditions, the playback during obtaining might be
suspended or the images might be distorted. You can
repeatedly play back the standard (normal) type of i-motion
movies after obtaining, but cannot play back the streaming
type of i-motion movies.
Save an i-motion Movie
You can save the obtained i-motion movie to your
FOMA phone and set it for a ring tone, the Stand-by
display, and the Wake-up display. You can save up to
101.6 Mbytes of files including other data files. (See
page 443)
Obtaining Completion displaySave
YESSelect a destination folder.
pSee page 162 for when i-motion movies are stored to
the maximum.
Select âYESâ to execute âSet imotionâ.
Go to âSet imotionâ on page 282.
â When downloading i-motion movie is suspended
When you press l(
) to suspend downloading or
when downloading is suspended by an incoming call, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to resume
downloading.
Select âYESâ to resume downloading the remaining part.
Select âNOâ to show the Obtaining Completion display for a
partially savable i-motion file. Select âSave pt.â to save that
file to any folder in âimotionâ in âData boxâ.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from
âData boxâ.
pThe file name of the partially saved i-motion movie is
âmovieâ.
pWhen the playable period or playable deadline of the
partially saved i-motion movie has expired, you cannot
download the remaining segments of the file. You can
delete the partially saved file when you try to download the
file.
pPartially saved i-motion movies cannot be played back from
Data Box.
< imotion Auto-play>
Setting Automatic Replay of
i-motion Movies
You can set whether to play back an i-motion movie
automatically, for when you have obtained a standard
(normal) type of i-motion movie from a site or have
selected a screen memo which contains a standard
(normal) type of i-motion movie.
ii-mode settingsimotion auto-play
ON or OFF
Information
pNote that a streaming type of i-motion movie is played back
automatically even if this function is set to âOFFâ.
DoCoMo or IPs (Information Providers) distribute news,
weather forecast and others as graphical information to
i-Channel mobile phones. Information is periodically
received and tickers flow on the Stand-by display for the
latest information. You can press the i-Channel key to
show the Channel List. (See page 170)
In addition, by selecting a channel you want to see on the
Channel List, you can obtain detailed information. Also,
two types of channels are available, âBasic channelâ and
âFavorite channelâ. âBasic channelâ is provided by
DoCoMo and comes with the FOMA phone, so you can
browse that channel as soon as you start using i-Channel.
The packet communication fee that is charged for
auto-updates of information distributed through âBasic
channelâ is not charged.
âFavorite channelâ is provided by IPs (Information
Providers) other than DoCoMo, so you can register and
use any channels you like. The packet communication
fee that is charged for auto-updates of information
distributed through âFavorite channelâ is not included
in the i-Channel service fee. However, for both âBasic
channelâ and âFavorite channelâ, you are charged the
i-Channel service fee plus packet communication fee to
browse detailed information from the Channel List.
Also, the packet communication fee that is charged for
auto-updates of information distributed through the
Basic channel during international roaming is not
included in the i-Channel service fee.
pi-Channel is a pay service which is available on a
subscription basis.
(You need to subscribe to i-mode to apply for i-Channel.)
pFor details on i-Channel, refer to the âMobile Phone Userâs
Guide [i-mode]â.
pThe i-Channel service is provided in Japanese only.
Information
pWhen the FOMA phone is turned off or if radio wave
conditions are bad such as when it is out of the service
area, you may not be able to receive information even if you
have contracted to the i-Channel service. In that case,
select the channel for unsigned subscribers that appears by
pressing +Zo; then you can now receive information, and
tickers flow on the Stand-by display. If your FOMA phone
remains in the default state, you may not be able to receive
information. Press +Zo, and then information is received
and tickers flow on the Stand-by display.
pTo receive i-Channel information overseas, you are charged
a communication fee by channel (domestic talk-free service
does not apply).
pAfter you cancel the contract for the i-Channel service, the
ticker setting is automatically set to off.
pIf you cancel the contract for the i-mode service before you
cancel the contract for the i-Channel service, the ticker
setting remains on.
169
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Information
pDepending on the i-motion movie, you might not be able to
save the obtained data to the FOMA phone.
What is i-Channel?
< Ticker ON/OFF>
Using i-Channel
When âTicker ON/OFFâ is set to âONâ, up to 10 ticker
files for the latest information flow repeatedly on the
Stand-by display. If you want to know more about the
information, you can obtain the details from the
Channel List.
Press Zo.
The Channel List appears
regardless of the âTicker ON/OFFâ
setting.
pâ â blinks during receiving
information.
Channel List
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Select an item (link).
Information
pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not
work even when information comes in. In addition, the Call/
Charging indicator does not light or flicker.
pTickers are not displayed in the following cases:
When the information is automatically updated after that or
when you press +Zo to receive the latest information,
tickers automatically flow.
シWhen the UIM is replaced.
シWhen âHost selectionâ is changed.
シWhen âReset i-Channelâ is executed.
シWhen âReset settingsâ is executed.
シWhen âInitializeâ is executed.
However, the information might not be automatically
updated when âHost selectionâ is changed. To receive the
latest information, press +Zo to display the Channel List.
pWhen âHost selectionâ is changed, the i-Channel connecting
end is also changed. (In ordinary, you do not need to
change the setting.)
pDepending on your usage state, you might receive
information from i-Channel when you display the Channel
List.
170
Setting How Ticker is Displayed
ii-Channel
Do the following operations.
Item
Operation/Explanation
Channel list
You can display the Channel List.
Go to step 2 on page 170.
Ticker ON/
OFF
You can set whether to display tickers on the
Stand-by display.
ON or OFF
Ticker scroll
speed
You can set the ticker flowing speed.
Select a speed.
Reset
i-Channel
You can initialize the ticker information, set
âTicker ON/OFFâ to âONâ, and âi-Channel
tickerâ of âPrivate windowâ to âOFFâ.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pYou can perform âTicker ON/OFFâ, âTicker scroll speedâ,
and âReset i-Channelâ for each mode of 2in1. However,
i-Channel information is initialized for all modes. Further,
when 2in1 is deactivated, they become common to the
settings in A Mode.
pWhen âTicker ON/OFFâ is set to âONâ and an animation is
set for the Stand-by display, playback of the image is
suspended after five seconds, and tickers start flowing.
pIn Public Mode (Drive Mode), or during Lock All, tickers are
not displayed.
pTickers are not displayed after you execute âReset
i-Channelâ. When the information is automatically updated
after that or when you press +Zo to receive the latest
information, tickers automatically flow.
Mail
What is i-mode Mail?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-mail
Composing i-mode Mail to Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšCompose Messageâş
Composing Deco-mail to Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composing Deco-mail by Using Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšTemplateâş
Attaching Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšAttachmentsâş
Using Photo-sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšPhoto-sendingâş
172
175
178
179
181
Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšMail Auto-receiveâş
Receiving Selected i-mode Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšReceive Optionâş
Checking whether Center Holds i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšCheck New Messageâş
Replying to Received i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšReplyâşâšReply with Quoteâş
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšForwardâş
When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/Pasted is Received. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
183
183
184
184
184
Operating Mail Box
Displaying Mail from Inbox/Outbox/Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšInboxâşâšOutboxâşâšDraftâş
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
187
191
Using Mail History
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšSent Addressâş âšReceived Addressâş
195
Setting Mail Settings
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšAuto-sortâş
Creating Mail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšMail Groupâş
Setting Mail and Messages R/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšMail Settingsâş
196
197
198
Using Message Services
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšReceive Message R/Fâş
Reading Received Messages R/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšDisplay Message R/Fâş
200
201
Using Area Mail
What is Area Mail? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Area Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Area Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšArea Mail Settingsâş
202
202
202
Using Chat Mail
Using Chat Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšChat Mailâş
Creating Chat Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšChat Groupâş
203
205
Using SMS
Composing SMS Messages to Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšCompose SMSâş
Receiving SMS Messages Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšReceive SMSâş
Checking whether Center Holds SMS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšCheck New SMSâş
Setting SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšSMS Settingsâş
206
207
208
208
Using Web Mail
Using Web Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšWeb Mailâş
208
171
What is i-mode Mail?
Once you subscribe to i-mode, you can exchange
e-mails over the Internet as well as with other i-mode
phones (including mova phones).
You can attach up to 10 files (JPEG, ToruCa, PDF, etc.)
within 2 Mbytes in total besides mail text. The i-mode
mail also supports Deco-mail, so you can change the
character color, character size, and background color
of mail text. Further, a variety of Decomail-pictographs
you can insert into text are pre-installed, so you can
easily compose pleasant messages to send.
pFor details on the i-mode mail, refer to the âMobile Phone
Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
< Compose Message>
Composing i-mode Mail to Send
Mail
You can compose and send i-mode mail messages.
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages
including SMS messages to the Outbox.
See page 175 for composing Deco-mail.
ll(
Address field
Subject field
Attachment field
Text field
(When you enter text, the
number of bytes is displayed.)
Message Composition
display
Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Phonebook . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . Select a phone number or mail
).
address and press Oo(
Received address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
).
address and press Oo(
Mail group . . . . . . Select a mail group.
Enter address . . . Enter a mail address or phone
number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pIf the destination is an i-mode phone, you can send mail
also by entering only the part preceding the â@â mark of
a mail address.
pSee page 173 for sending to multiple destination
addresses.
pSee page 173 for deleting an added address.
Select the subject fieldEnter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch
characters.
172
Select the attachment fieldSelect an item.
pSee page 179 for how to select an attachment.
Select the text fieldEnter text.
pYou can enter up to 5,000
full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pSee page 174 for pasting a
header or signature.
pYou can select Decomail-pictures
by pressing and holding d for
at least one second.
Message Entry display
Press l(
OK
).
The animation display during transmission appears and
the mail message is sent.
pTo cancel sending midway, press Oo(
) or press
and hold r (for at least one second). However, the
mail message might be sent depending on the timing.
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters
might not be displayed correctly at the destination.
pIf you send an i-mode mail message to other carrierâs
mobile phone (au/SoftBank/Tu-Ka) with a pictograph
entered, the pictograph is automatically converted into a
similar pictograph at the receiving end. Depending on the
model or function of the receiving endâs mobile phone,
however, the pictograph might not be correctly displayed or
be converted into a character or â=â when no corresponding
pictograph is found.
pWhen the number of sent mail messages exceeds the
FOMA phoneâs storage maximum, they will be overwritten
from the oldest one. However, protected sent mail
messages cannot be overwritten.
pYou cannot compose an i-mode mail message when the
number of sent mail messages in the Outbox has reached
the maximum and those messages are all protected, or
when 20 mail messages are saved to the Draft or the Draft
is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/
delete draft mail messages, and then operate again.
pWhen you select âCompose messageâ from the Function
menu while entering a phone number, the mail address is
entered as a destination address if the phone number and
mail address are stored in a Phonebook entry. When
multiple mail addresses are stored in the Phonebook entry,
the first mail address is entered.
pIf you try to send the mail whose address is a phone number
headed by â184â/â186â, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send the mail.
Information
pYou cannot send mail to the addresses that include a
comma (,).
pYou can enter an address in the To, Cc and Bcc fields.
pIf the destination address has been stored in the
Phonebook with a secret code, the secret code will be
added automatically at sending. However, even if a secret
code is stored in the Phonebook, the secret code will not be
added and the mail will be sent as ordinary i-mode mail
unless the address is a phone number or âphone
number@docomo.ne.jpâ.
pIf you store the secret code and send mail to a mail address
other than that of DoCoMo mobile phones, you might not
receive the error message for unknown address.
pThe recipients might not be able to receive the full length of
the subject depending on their phones.
pYou can send up to 2,000 full-pitch characters in text to the
i-mode phone of the mova service.
pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose i-mode mail.
Function Menu of the Message Composition Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Send
You can send the mail message.
Go to step 7 on page 172.
Preview
Check the address, subject, text and
attachments before sending.
pYou can send the mail message by pressing
l(
).
Save
When composing or editing the mail, you can
save it to the Draft.
Operation/Explanation
Operate
You can add multiple addresses in the
receiver
address field to send the same i-mode mail to
(Add receiver) multiple recipients simultaneously. You can
send the same mail to up to five addresses at
the same time.
Add receiverSelect an item.
Phonebook
. . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
).
and press Oo(
Received address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
).
and press Oo(
Enter address
. . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pTo consecutively add addresses, select
and repeat the above steps.
pPress i(
) and select âDelete
receiverâ to delete the selected mail
address. Select âYESâ.
pPress i(
) and select âChange rcv.
typeâ to change the type of mail.
(See page 173)
pSelect an entered mail address on the Mail
Composition display to show the Address
List.
l(
Operate
receiver
(Delete
receiver)
Mail
pEach line feed is counted as one full-pitch character, and a
space is counted as one full-pitch or half-pitch character.
pThe mail message you entered a Decomail-pictograph
becomes a Deco-mail message.
Function menu
You can delete the selected address when
there are multiple addresses.
Delete receiverYES
Operate
Change rcv. type
receiver
Select a type of address.
(Change rcv. To. . . . . This is the direct destination
type)
address. âToâ recipients are
displayed at the receiving ends.âť
Cc . . . . Specify to let parties know the mail
contents in addition to the direct
recipients. âCcâ recipients are
displayed at the receiving ends.âť
Bcc . . . Specify to hide the recipients from
others. âBccâ recipients are not
displayed at the receiving ends.
âťThey might not be displayed depending on
the mobile phone, device, or mail software
of the receiving end.
173
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Operate att. file You can shoot and attach an image or
(Activate
i-motion movie.
camera)
Activate cameraSelect a shooting mode.
pSee page 139 and page 141 for how to
shoot.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Operate att. file See page 179.
(Attach file)
Operate att. file See page 180.
(Delete att. file)
Template
You can read in a template and compose
(Load template) Deco-mail.
Load template
pWhen the text has already been entered,
the confirmation display appears asking
whether to delete the text.
Information
pYou cannot paste a header/signature if the text, including
the header/signature, would exceed 5,000 full-pitch or
10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf the decoration such as font color or character size is set
for the top or end of text, the header or signature will be
decorated as well.
Function Menu of the Message Entry Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Decorate mail See page 176.
Mail
Select a template.
The contents of the template are entered into
the text.
pWhile selecting a template, press
l(
) to check the contents of the
template.
pSee page 175 for composing Deco-mail.
Template
You can save the Deco-mail you are
(Save template) composing as a template.
Save templateYES
pSee page 162 when templates are stored to
the maximum.
pSee page 178 for how to check the stored
template.
Add header/
sig.
You can paste a header/signature at the
beginning or ending of the text of the i-mode
mail.
pYou need to store the header/signature
beforehand. (See page 199)
Information
pYou cannot add any addresses if the address field for âToâ,
âCcâ, and âBccâ already contains five addresses in total or
contains no addresses.
pYou cannot send i-mode mail if the âToâ field is blank.
pThe subject of i-mode mail you are composing will be the
title of the template. If no subject is entered, the title takes
the name of âYYYY/MM/DD hh:mmâ.
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
Template
See page 174.
(Load template)
Template
See page 174.
(Save template)
Full pitch/Half See page 358.
pitch
Copy
See page 360.
Cut
See page 360.
Paste
See page 361.
Undo
After entering or deleting characters, pasting data,
or operating on a decoration, you can undo your
most recent operation. You can do it up to twice.
pYou can undo the operation also by
pressing m(
).
Pictograph/
symbols
(Pictograph)
See page 358.
Pictograph/
symbols
(Symbols)
See page 358.
Pictograph/
symbols
(Space)
See page 358.
Phrase/code/ See page 358.
quote
(Common
phrases)
Phrase/code/ See page 359.
quote
(Kuten code)
Phrase/code/ See page 359.
quote
(Input time)
Phrase/code/ See page 359.
quote
(Quote
phonebook)
174
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Phrase/code/ See page 359.
quote
(Quote own
data)
Phrase/code/
quote
(By position
loc.)
You can obtain the current location
information by using the GPS function,
convert that information into the URL, and
then paste it to the i-mode mail text.
Paste locationBy position loc.
Oo(
)YES
Phrase/code/
quote
(From loc.
history)
You can convert the location information
retained in Location History of the GPS
function into the URL, and paste it to the imode mail text.
Paste locationFrom loc. history
Select a location recordYES
You can convert the location information
stored in the Phonebook into the URL, and
paste it to the i-mode mail text.
Paste locationFrom phonebook
Select a Phonebook entryOo(
YES
Phrase/code/ See page 146.
quote
(Bar code
reader)
Operation/Explanation
Help
See page 359.
JUMP
See page 359.
Preview
You can check the contents of the text before
sending.
pYou can preview also by pressing p.
Information
pOnce you use âUndoâ to return to the previous status, you
cannot cancel this by using âUndoâ again.
pIf you close the Message Entry display, you cannot return to
the previous status by using âUndoâ when you re-open it.
(However, after you have exited âPreviewâ, you can return
to the previous status by âUndoâ.)
pYou can paste up to 512 half-pitch characters by Paste
Location, and the pasted URL is counted as the number of
characters in the mail text.
pâ â is inserted before the URL pasted by Paste Location.
However, you can delete it while editing.
Mail
Phrase/code/
quote
(From
phonebook)
Function menu
Composing Deco-mail to Send
When editing an i-mode mail message, you can change
the size of the font and the color of the background as
well as inserting images, thus composing your own
original mail. You can compose Deco-mail also using
the templates (patterns). (See page 178)
Char. input/dict. See page 361.
(Own
dictionary)
Activated
decoration
Char. input/dict. See page 361.
(Learned
words)
Char. input/dict. See page 359.
(Change input
mode)
Char. input/dict. See page 359.
(Candid. disp.
size)
Entering characters
Char. input/dict. See page 358.
(Predict)
Ticker
Decomailpictograph
Background
color
Insert line
Char. input/dict. See page 359.
(Candidate
display)
Moving
font effect
Word
alignment
Insert image
Char. input/dict. See page 359.
(Character set
time)
Previewing
Perform the operations in step 1 through
step 3 on page 172.
175
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Char. input/dict. See page 359.
(2/NIKO-touch
guide)
Font color
Font size
Swing
Blink
2
Select the text field
Decorate the text using Palette.
pSee page 176 for how to use Palette.
To enter text after selecting decorations
dSelect one of decorations
Enter text.
To set decorations after entering text
Enter textd
(Select area)
Mail
Go to âSelect areaâ on page 177.
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters. (The number of characters you can enter
decreases depending on the decoration.)
pOnce you decorate the mail text, â
â appears.
pYou can preview the contents of the text by pressing
p.
Press i(
) to finish previewing and return to
the former display.
Press Oo(
).
The Message Composition display is displayed.
Go to step 6 on page 172.
Information
pEven if you delete the decorated characters, only the
decoration data remain and the number of characters you
can enter might decrease. Clear the decoration and then
delete the characters. If you delete the characters by
pressing and holding -r for at least one second, the
characters as well as the decoration data are deleted.
pWhen you reply with quote to the received Deco-mail or you
forward it, the decorations or inserted images are displayed
at the replying destination or forwarding destination.
pIf you use a template containing an image unable to attach
to mail for sending, the image is deleted.
About Decorations
You can decorate the text of i-mode mail using Palette.
You can set multiple decorations for one point.
pYou cannot combine Word Alignment, Ticker, and Swing for
one point.
pLines are inserted by Line Insert with the color specified by
Font Color.
pIf Word Alignment, Ticker, or Swing is specified, the images
and moving font effects are inserted with the specified state.
pYou can enter Decomail-pictographs using âInsert imageâ,
and from âPictographâ on the Function menu as well.
â How to use Palette
Press d from the Message Entry display to display
Palette.
pWhen the cursor is over the decorated character, the Palette
appears with the icon for the set decoration depressed.
); then
Highlight the depressed icon and press Oo(
you can change, complete or cancel the decoration. You can
release the area selection also by pressing r while the
area is selected.
pPress i(
) to close Palette. You can close Palette
also by pressing r while you are operating on it.
Switch operations
You can switch between the operation of Palette and the
operation of entering text, each time you press d. You can
move the cursor and enter text with Palette displayed.
pAfter you enter text, the text entry operation returns.
When you use Palette in succession, press d and
operate.
pWhen you send a Deco-mail message in excess of 10,000
bytes to a Deco-mail incompatible model or a Deco-mail
compatible model other than the models described belowâť,
it is received at the destination as a mail message with the
URL for browsing Deco-mail described.
However, depending on the incompatible model, only the
mail text without the URL for browsing might be received.
âť903i series, 904i series, 905i series, 703i series (except
P703if), 704i series (except P704if)
pDecorations might not be correctly displayed if you send or
receive Deco-mail to and from devices such as personal
computers.
pThe movement and blink of Ticker/Swing and animation
playback stop when a certain period has passed.
176
Palette operation
â How to operate Decoration
Function
Function
Operation/Explanation
You can convert characters to a mark and
(Insert image/ insert it into the text. The mark animates in
various ways and conveys your feelings to the
Font effect)
other party.
Select a moving font effect
Enter text.
pTo delete the moving font effect, move the
cursor to the moving font effect and press
r.
(Decorate all
reset)
(Select area)
You can insert the image stored in âMy
(Insert image/ pictureâ into the text of mail.
Select a folderSelect an image.
My picture)
pYou can select a Decomail-picture by
pressing and holding d for at least one
second from the Message Entry display.
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the
image and press r.
You can change the background color of the
(Background mail text.
Select a color.
color)
(Insert line)
(Undo)
You can insert a horizontal line into the mail
text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and
the line is inserted.
pTo delete the line, move the cursor to the
line and press r.
Select an icon and set, change, or add
decorations.
pSelect another icon in succession to change
the multiple decorations or add decorations.
pWhen Blink, Ticker, or Swing has been set,
reselect each icon and complete
decorations.
Select the icon for Blink, Ticker, or Swing
Select the same icon again.
(Font size)
You can change the size of characters to be
entered.
Select a font sizeEnter text.
pIn the font size changing mode, â â or
â â is displayed at the upper right of the
display.
pYou can set other decorations in
succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do
not need to enter text.
You can make characters to be entered blink.
(Select blink) Enter text.
The set characters are blinking.
pIn the blink setting mode, â â is displayed
at the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in
succession.
d
(Reset blink)
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
You can return to the previous status of the
set decoration. You can do it up to twice.
pYou can undo the operation also by
).
pressing m(
You can set Font Color, Blink, Font Size,
Word Alignment, Ticker and Swing over the
selected text you have entered. You can also
change the set decoration, add another
decoration, or cancel Blink, Ticker or Swing.
Select a start point.
pYou can select all text by pressing
i(
) and selecting âYESâ.
Mail
(Font color)
You can release all the decorations.
YES
pIf you have inserted an image, the message
âIn-line image is deletedâ is displayed.
Select an end point.
Set, change, add or cancel each decoration.
pâ
â is displayed at the upper right
of the display during selecting decoration
area.
You can insert the image shot by a camera on
(Insert image/ the spot into the text of mail.
Shoot a still image.
Camera)
pThe image size of the camera is Sub-QCIF
(128 x 96), QCIF (176 x 144), QVGA (240 x
320) or CIF (352 x 288).
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the
image and press r.
pSee step 2 and step 3 of âShoot a Still
Imageâ on page 139 for how to shoot.
You can change the color of characters and
lines to be entered.
Select a colorEnter text.
pIn the font color changing mode, â â is
displayed at the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in
succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do
not need to enter text.
Operation/Explanation
177
Function
Operation/Explanation
You can make characters to be entered and
(Select ticker) images to be inserted flow (moving from right
to left).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and
â
â is displayed before and after the
cursor.
pIn the ticker setting mode, â â is displayed
at the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
Mail
d
(Reset ticker)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
You can make characters to be entered and
(Select swing) images to be inserted swing (moving to left
and right back).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and
â
â is displayed before and after the
cursor.
pIn the swing setting mode, â â is displayed
at the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d
(Reset swing)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
(Word
alignment)
You can change the position of characters to
be entered and images to be inserted.
Select a word alignmentEnter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and
the alignment is set.
pIn the word alignment setting mode, â â is
displayed at the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do
not need to enter text.
Information
pYou can insert up to 20 kinds of image within 90 Kbytes in
total. However, even if the inserted kinds of image are 20 or
fewer, the confirmation display appears for some operations
asking whether to re-edit the text because the maximum
number of images has exceeded.
pIf multiple same images are inserted, they are counted as a
single type of file. If you copy/paste the image already
inserted, that image is regarded as the same image and
handled as a single type of file including the copied origin.
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which another
color is set, the setting changes to that color.
pThe color for pictographs is also subjected to the specified
font color. To restore the color to ordinary one, select âćĺŽ
ăŞă/Defaultâ.
pYou cannot change the color of Decomail-pictographs.
178
Information
pYou cannot change the background color when editing the
header or signature.
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which a different
font size is set, the font size is changed to that size of the
character.
pYou cannot change the size of the Decomail-pictograph.
pYou cannot make Decomail-pictographs blink.
< Template>
Composing Deco-mail by Using
Template
Template is form data for Deco-mail for which
decorations such as font size and image insertion are
already specified.
Other than those pre-installed in the FOMA phone, you
can download templates from sites (see page 161). You
can also save Deco-mail you sent, received or
composed as a template (see page 174 and page 194).
You can edit the saved template using Palette.
pYou can delete the pre-installed templates. You can
re-download them from the âP-SQUAREâ site (see
page 163). When you use a UIM other than the one used for
downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 39) are set to
them.
lTemplateSelect a template.
Template List
Detailed Template
display
pPress l(
) to compose Deco-mail using the
contents of the template. Go to step 2 on page 172.
pEven if you set âHeader/signatureâ to automatically
paste the header or signature, you cannot paste it.
pSee page 162 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
Function Menu of the Template List
Function menu
Compose
message
Operation/Explanation
You can compose Deco-mail using the
contents of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
Function menu
Sort
Operation/Explanation
You can change the order of displayed
templates.
Select an order.
Edit title
Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30
half-pitch characters.
Info
You can display the file size, saved date and
time of the template, and whether it contains
images.
No. of
messages
You can display the number of stored
templates.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete
selected)
Delete selectedPut a check mark for
templates to be deletedl(
YES
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security
CodeYES
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Compose
message
You can compose Deco-mail using the
contents of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
Edit
You can edit the contents of the template and
save it.
Edit the textOo(
)YES or NO
YES . . . Overwrites and saves.
NO . . . . Saves as a separate file.
pSee step 2 through step 3 on page 176 for
how to edit the text.
pSee page 162 when the templates are
stored to the maximum.
Save insert
image
You can save images inserted into the
template or Deco-mail text, and set them as
the Stand-by display and Wake-up display.
Select an imageYES
Select a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 159.
pSee page 162 when images are stored to
the maximum.
You can send an i-mode mail message with files
attached.
You can attach following files:
ăťStill image
ăťMoving image/i-motion movie
ăťMelody
ăťPDF file
ăťToruCa file
ăťPhonebook entry ăťSchedule event ăťToDo item
ăťBookmark (i-mode, Full Browser)
ăťWord
ăťExcel
ăťPowerPoint
ăťSD other files
You can attach up to 10 files within 2 Mbytes in total.
pYou cannot attach files that are prohibited from being
attached to mail or output from the FOMA phone to other
devices.
pRegardless of the âFile restrictionâ setting, you can attach the
still image or moving image/i-motion movie shot with your
FOMA phone or the files received via infrared rays.
pWhen you attach a file, another attachment field appears on
the Message Composition display.
pWhen the receiving end is not the model described belowâť,
it receives only compatible files within the memory space of
that model.
âť903i series, 904i series, 905i series, 703i series (except
P703if), 704i series (except P704if)
pIt might take a time to send the i-mode mail depending on the
size of attached files.
Message Composition display
Select the attachment field
Do the following operations.
Item
Operation/Explanation
Picture
Select a folderSelect an image.
pHighlight an attached image and press
Oo(
) to display the image.
Press r to return to the former display.
Melody
Select a folderSelect a melody.
pHighlight an attached melody and press
Oo(
) to play back the melody.
Press any key to stop the playback.
imotion
Select a folder
Select an i-motion movie.
pHighlight the attached i-motion movie and
) to play back the i-motion
press o
movie.
Press r during playback or stop the
playback to return to the former display.
ToruCa
When the ToruCa file is a ToruCa file (details),
it is attached as a ToruCa file (details).
Select a folderSelect a ToruCa file.
pHighlight the attached ToruCa file and press
Oo(
) to preview it. Press r to
return to the former display.
179
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Information
pThe title name when saved as a separate file takes âYYYY/
MM/DD hh:mmâ
(Y: Year, M: Month, D: Date, h: hour, m: minute).
pDecomail-pictographs are saved to the âăć°ăŤĺ
Ľă
(Favorite)â folder in the âDecomail-pictographâ folder.
Attaching Files
Mail
Function Menu of the Detailed Template Display
< Attachments>
Item
Operation/Explanation
PDF
Select a folderSelect a PDF file.
pHighlight an attached PDF file and press
Oo(
) to display the PDF file.
Press r to return to the former display.
Phonebook
Select a search method
Select a Phonebook entryOo(
pWhen you specified a search method last
time, the Phonebook entry is searched by
that method.
Schedule
Select a dateSelect a schedule event
Oo(
ToDo
Select a ToDo itemOo(
Bookmark
i-mode or Full Browser
Select a bookmark.
Document file You can attach a file of Word, Excel, and
PowerPoint.
Select a folderSelect a file.
Mail
Other
You can attach a file stored in the âSD other
filesâ.
Select a folderSelect a file.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
Information
pThe images are not sent as the attachments to i-mode
phones of the mova service; they are in the form of URLs for
browsing images and automatically attached with expiry
dates and can be obtained by selecting URLs. The mail text
that can be sent to an i-mode phone of the mova service is
up to 184 full-pitch characters (369 bytes). (When the
acceptable number of characters of the mova phone is â250
full-pitch charactersâ)
When multiple files are attached, the files are deleted and
just the mail text is sent.
pThe i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF
images.
pYou can attach a Flash movie as well.
pThe still image might not be received correctly or not be
displayed or coarsely displayed depending on the model at
the receiving end.
pMelodies stored on the microSD memory card cannot be
attached. Copy the melodies to the FOMA phone. (See
page 297)
pIf the receiving end is other than FOMA P905i, the sent
melody might not be played back correctly or the
attachment might be deleted.
pYou cannot receive the attached melody on the i-mode
phone of the mova service.
180
Information
pSome i-motion movies cannot be attached to mail or their
file sizes may become larger or smaller.
pMoving images stored on the microSD memory card cannot
be attached. Copy the moving images to the FOMA phone.
(See page 297)
pDepending on the mobile phone of the receiving end, i-motion
movies cannot be correctly received/displayed, might become
coarse, or might be converted into consecutive still images.
When sending moving images to other than the model described
belowâť, it is advisable to shoot them with the following settings:
File size setting: Mail restrictân (S)
Image quality: Normal
âť903i series, 904i series, 905i series, 703i series (except
P703if), 704i series (except P704if)
pToruCa files stored on the microSD memory card cannot be
attached. Copy the ToruCa files to the FOMA phone. (See
page 227)
Delete Attached File
You can delete an attached file you are selecting or all
attached files.
Message Composition display i(
Operate att. fileDelete att. file
Delete this or Delete allYES
pTo delete a single file, highlight the file to be deleted.
< Photo-sending>
Using Photo-sending
You can send photos (still images) to the other party
during a voice call. The photo is sent as the attachments of
i-mode mail, and the receiving end can view it during a call.
To send photos during a voice call, you need to store the
phone number and mail address of the other party in the
same Phonebook entry beforehand.
Depending on the model of other partyâs phone, the other
party might not be able to view the photo during a call.
Shoot and Send Photos
During a voice call, you can send photos (still images)
you shoot on the spot.
During a voice calli(
Shoot/send photoPhoto mode
The camera starts up.
Press Oo(
Oo(
)Select a folder
Select a mail address.
).
The photo is shot.
pPress h from the Finder display to return to the
âTalkingâ display.
pSee page 143 for how to operate on the Finder display.
The photo is saved and sent.
pYou can send it also by pressing i(
) and
selecting âSave & sendâ.
pYou can set âSet displayâ and âFile restrictionâ by
). (See page 140 and page 146)
pressing i(
pWhen multiple mail addresses are stored, select the
mail address you send the mail message to.
pWhen you select âQuitâ, the photo is saved to the Draft
as the image-attached mail.
Information
pPhoto-sending is not available in the following cases:
ăťWhen the phone number and mail address of the other party
on the phone are not stored in the same Phonebook entry
ăťWhen the phone number and mail address of the other party
on the phone are stored as secret data in the Phonebook
ăťWhen a caller ID is not notified to the receiving end (User
unset, PublicPhone, Unavailable etc.)
(However, you can send from the calling end.)
ăťWhen âRestrict dialingâ is not set for the phone number of
the other party on the phone during âRestrict dialingâ
ăťWhen the number of sent mail messages in the Outbox
has reached the maximum and those messages are all
protected, or when 20 mail messages are saved to the
Draft or the Draft is full (You cannot send.)
ăťWhen the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail (You
cannot receive.)
ăťDuring Call Waiting
ăťIn B Mode of 2in1
pYou cannot send Flash movies by Photo-sending.
pYou cannot send some photos (images) during a voice call.
pA photo sent/received during a voice call is saved to the
Outbox or Inbox as a file attachment of the image mail (the
subject is the phone number).
Information
pThe image sizes of the camera are QCIF (176 x 144) and
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96).
Select and Send Photos
You can send the saved photos (still images).
During a voice calli(
Shoot/send photoMy picture
Select a folderSelect a photo
Select a mail address.
The photo is sent.
pYou can select a photo (still image) of QCIF (176 x 144)
and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96).
pWhen multiple mail addresses are stored, select the
mail address you send the mail message to.
181
Mail
â When you received a photo (still image)
When âPhoto auto displayâ is set to âONâ, the photo is
automatically displayed.
If you have received multiple photos during a voice call, you
can press No to switch them.
pYou can display the received photo during a voice call by
) and selecting âDisplay photoâ.
pressing i(
pYou can also execute âCheck new msg.â during a voice call
). (See page 183)
by pressing i(
< Mail Auto-receive>
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically
When the FOMA phone is in the service area, you can
receive i-mode mail, SMS messages and SMS reports
automatically. (See page 183 for receiving i-mode mail
after selecting it.)
When a mail message comes in, â (white)â appears at
the top of the display.
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail
messages including SMS messages.
Mail
When i-mode mail arrives, â (white)â blinks
and the receiving message is displayed.
When receiving is completed, the
display shows the number of
received i-mode mail messages
and Messages R/F.
Reception Result display
pYou can display the Inbox List by
selecting âMailâ.
pTo cancel receiving midway, select âCancelâ or press
and hold r for at least one second while âMail
Receiving...â is displayed. However, the mail message
might be received depending on the timing.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, â
â
(see page 112) appears on the desktop and the former
display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for âMail/Msg. ring timeâ.)
â, and press Oo(
) to
Press Oo, highlight â
display the Inbox List.
pSee page 30 for when the FOMA phone is closed.
Information
pYou can automatically receive up to 100 Kbytes of an
i-mode mail message including attached files. You can
manually obtain the attached files in excess of 100 Kbytes
from the i-mode Center. (See page 185)
pWhen the total number or size of received messages stored
in the FOMA phone has reached the maximum, the mail
messages will be overwritten in the priority order of mail in
the âTrash boxâ folder and older received mail. However,
unread or protected mail is not overwritten.
pWhen the total number of unread or protected mail
messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum, no new
mail can be received and â (black)â is displayed. To
receive i-mode mail, delete received mail or read unread
mail or release protection of mail until â (black)â clears,
and then perform âCheck new messageâ.
pYou can receive i-mode mail with melodies, still images, or
other files attached. You can receive incompatible attached
files but you cannot display them.
pWhen you receive mail from a device that can set To, Cc
and Bcc, you can check whether the message was sent to
you as To, Cc or Bcc.
182
Information
pMail Messages for you are held at the i-mode Center in the
following cases:
ăťWhen the power is off ăťDuring a videophone call
ăťDuring Self Mode
ăťDuring infrared data exchange
ăťDuring Omakase Lock ăťDuring iC Communication
ăťWhen you are out of the service area
ăťWhile connecting to the FirstPass center
ăťDuring PushTalk communication
ăťWhile copying to the microSD memory card
ăťWhile connecting to the Data Storage Center
ăťWhen the space of the Inbox is full with protected or
unread messages
pWhen i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center,
â (white)â appears, and when they are held to the
maximum, â (black)â, appears.
Display Newly Received i-mode Mail
Reception Result displayMailSelect an
i-mode mail message to be displayed.
pPress and hold No for at least
one second from the detailed
i-mode mail display to change
the size of text characters.
When you set to âLargeâ, the
characters on the Folder List and
the Inbox/Outbox/Draft List are
displayed in large size as well.
Information
pUndisplayable characters are replaced by spaces, etc.
pWhen the number of characters in the text of received
i-mode mail exceeds the maximum, â/â or â//â is inserted at
the end of the text and the excess part is deleted
automatically.
pThe still image automatically displayed at opening might not
be correctly displayed. When the image is larger than the
screen size, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio
retained.
pSome decorations inserted into the decorated mail (HTML
mail) sent from a personal computer might not be displayed
correctly.
< Receive Option>
< Check New Message>
Receiving Selected i-mode Mail
Checking whether Center Holds
i-mode Mail
You can check the titles of i-mode mail messages held
at the i-mode Center and select them to receive, or
delete them at the Center before receiving.
To use this function, set âReceive option settingâ to
âONâ beforehand.
When âReceive option settingâ is set to âONâ, you
cannot receive i-mode mail messages automatically.
When a mail message comes in the i-mode Center, â â
is displayed.
Receive Option Setting
You can set whether to select and receive necessary
i-mode mail only.
lMail settingsReceive option setting
ON or OFF
Select and Receive Mail Messages
lReceive option
Operate following the procedure
described in âMobile Phone Userâs Guide
[i-mode]â.
pWhen âReceive option settingâ is set to âOFFâ, the
display to the effect that it will be set to âONâ appears.
) to set âReceive option settingâ.
Press Oo(
pYou can bring up the Receive Option display also by
iiMenuăĄăăĽăźďźć¤ç´˘ (Menu/Search)
ăĄăźăŤé¸ćĺ俥 (Receive Option).
Information
pEven when Receive Option Setting is set to âONâ, you will
still receive all mail messages if you execute âCheck new
messageâ. If you do not want to receive all mail messages,
remove a check mark from âMailâ. (See page 199)
pWhen you bring up the Receive Option display, the â â icon
goes off. Also, the â â icon goes off if you turn the power off
or bring up the mail display.
pYou cannot select SMS messages for receiving.
Press and hold l for at least one second.
â (white)â and â (white)/ (white)â will blink, the
message âChecking...â will be displayed, and the i-mode
mail and Messages R/F will be delivered.
On the results of checking, the numbers of the received
i-mode mail and Messages R/F are shown.
pTo cancel receiving midway, press and hold r for at
least one second. However, the mail message might be
received depending on the timing.
Information
pWhen icons such as â (black)â, â (black)/ (black)â or
â (black)â are displayed, the FOMA phone cannot receive
any more i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Delete
unnecessary mail and messages, or read unread mail and
messages, or release protection. (Read and unprotected
mail and messages are overwritten automatically from the
oldest one.)
pEven when i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode
Center, the â (white)â icon to that effect, or the â (black)â
icon telling that messages are held to the maximum at the imode Center might not appear.
(This happens if mail arrives at the Center when, for
instance, your FOMA phone is off.)
pYou can select items to be checked by âSet check new
messageâ.
pYou cannot use this function to receive SMS messages.
Use âCheck new SMSâ to receive them.
183
Mail
i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F arriving at
the i-mode Center are automatically sent to your FOMA
phone. However, the messages will be held at the imode Center if your FOMA phone cannot receive mail
because it is turned off or out of the service area, or
when Receive Option Setting is set to âONâ.
When â (white)â is displayed, receive mail by checking
the i-mode Center.
See âReceive optionâ when â â is displayed.
< Reply> < Reply with Quote>
Replying to Received i-mode Mail
You can reply to the sender. With âReply with quoteâ,
you can quote the original text in your received i-mode
mail and reply to it. You cannot use âReply with quoteâ
for SMS messages.
Inbox List/Detailed Received Mail display
i(
)Reply/forward
Reply or Reply with quote
pYou can reply also by pressing l(
).
pIf other recipients of the simultaneous mail are found,
you can choose whether to reply to the sender only or to
all addresses.
Select âTo senderâ or âTo allâ.
pJust one quotation mark (see page 199) is added to the
beginning of the text in the i-mode mail to be replied
with quote.
Mail
Enter a subject and text and send.
When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 3 on
page 172.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 3
of âComposing SMS Messages to Sendâ on page 206.
After you send mail, â
â changes to â
â.
Information
pFor the senderâs address that cannot be replied to (such as
when the mail address exceeds 50 half-pitch characters),
â
â is displayed.
pâRe:â is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be
replied or replied with a quotation. When the subject
exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess part is
deleted. (When âRe:â has already been prefixed, it changes
to âRe2:â and will be counted up toâRe99:â.)
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you
cannot quote it in your reply. Also, you cannot quote it when
using the DoCoMo keitai datalink or infrared data exchange
function. See page 188 for pasted data.
pIf the text of Deco-mail contains images that are prohibited
from being attached to mail or being output from the FOMA
phone to other devices, such images will be deleted when
you reply to it.
< Forward>
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail
You can forward the i-mode mail or SMS messages to others.
Inbox List/Detailed Received Mail display
i(
)Reply/forwardForward
pYou can forward also by pressing m(
Inbox List.
184
) from the
Enter an address and send the mail.
When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to
step 2 on page 172.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2
on page 206.
After you send mail, â
â changes to â
â.
Information
pâFw:â is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be
forwarded. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch
characters, the excess part is deleted. (When âFw:â has
already been prefixed, it changes to âFw2:â and will be
counted up toâFw99:â.)
pWhen you forward an i-mode mail message with a file you
have not obtained yet, the file information is deleted.
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you
cannot quote it in your forwarding mail. Also, you cannot
quote it when using the DoCoMo keitai datalink or infrared
data exchange function. See page 188 for pasted data.
pWhen a mail message is forwarded and a ToruCa file
(details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA
phone is prohibited is attached to the mail message, the
attached file returns to a ToruCa file before obtaining
details.
pWhen a mail message on the microSD memory card is
forwarded, the attached file is deleted.
pWhen you âForwardâ a mail/SMS message received to
Number B/Address B in Dual Mode of 2in1, the sent mail
message is retained in the Outbox or Draft, even if you
switch to A Mode.
When i-mode Mail with Files
Attached/Pasted is Received
You can receive up to 2 Mbytes of the attached files on
your FOMA phone. However, you receive only the
attached file information for the files in excess of 100
Kbytes, so you need to manually obtain those attached
files from the i-mode Center.
The FOMA phone supports following files:
ăťStill image ăťMoving image/i-motion movie
ăťMelody
ăťPDF file
ăťPC movie
ăťToruCa file ăťPhonebook entry ăťSchedule event
ăťToDo item
ăťBookmark (i-mode, Full Browser)
ăťWord
ăťExcel
ăťPowerPoint
You cannot play back or display the files other than
above. You can save them to any folder in âSD other
filesâ, or use the i-mode mail to forward them.
You can use âAttachment preferenceâ to select the files
to be received.
pWhen multiple data items are pasted, they might not be
displayed.
Obtain Receive Option Attached Files
You can obtain the receive option attached files held at
the i-mode Center.
Detailed Received Mail displaySelect an
attached file which has not been obtained.
After obtaining is completed, files
are played back/displayed.
Save Attached or Pasted Files
You can save the attached or pasted files that you have
obtained. You can set some files for a ring tone, or an
image on the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or
other displays.
Play Back/Display Attached or Pasted Files
You can play back or display the attached/pasted files
already obtained.
Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received
Mail displaySelect an attached file.
The file is played back or displayed.
pFor a PC movie or document file, the confirmation
display appears telling that you cannot play it back/
display it. Play it back/display it after saving it to the
microSD memory card.
pFor the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo
items, bookmarks, and files not supported by the FOMA
phone, the confirmation display appears asking whether
to save them.
Information
pWhen the senderâs device is other than FOMA P905i, the
received melodies might not be played back correctly.
pWhen the first attached file is an obtained still image, that
still image only is automatically displayed when the mail
message is opened. The size of a still image displayed
automatically is up to 5M (2592 x 1944) size.
pWhen the image size is larger than the screen, it is
displayed shrunk.
pYou cannot play back a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes.
pYou cannot play back a Flash movie in excess of 100
Kbytes.
pYou cannot display a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and
ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes.
Select a destination location or folder.
For melodies, go to step 2 on page 160.
For still images, go to step 3 on page 159.
For i-motion movies, go to step 2 on page 168.
pBookmarks are saved according to each information of
i-mode or Full Browser.
pIf the maximum number of files has already been saved
to the microSD memory card or there is no usable
memory space when you save SD other files, PC
movies, or document files, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to delete unnecessary files and
to save new files. Select âYESâ to list the files in the
Data Box, then select unnecessary files and delete
them. See page 162 for when files other than SD other
files, PC movies, or document files are stored to the
maximum.
Information
pYou cannot save a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes to the
FOMA phone.
pYou cannot save a Flash movie in excess of 100Kbytes to
the FOMA phone.
pYou cannot save a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and
ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA
phone.
185
Mail
pPC movies are saved to the destination folder in
âmicroSDâ folder of âPC Movieâ.
pThe files not supported by the FOMA phone are saved
to the destination folder in âSD other filesâ.
pEven if the files are supported by the FOMA phone,
some of them cannot be saved to the FOMA phone
depending on the file such as an invalid data file or
whose size is too large. In that case, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to save it to the
microSD memory card. When you save it, it is saved to
a destination folder in âSD other files.â
pThe confirmation display might appear telling that a part
of the file cannot be saved depending on the attached
file.
Information
pYou cannot obtain the attached files when the unused
memory space in the Inbox is smaller than the files.
Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received
Mail display/Detailed Message R/F display
Highlight an attached file and press
i(
)Operate file
Save attached fileYES
< Inbox> /< Outbox> /< Draft>
Displaying Mail from Inbox/
Outbox/Draft
Select a mail message.
Display Mail from Inbox
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail
messages including SMS messages.
You can save up to 30 Area Mail messages separately
from i-mode mail messages and SMS messages.
You can check the received i-mode mail messages,
SMS messages, and Area Mail messages.
lInboxSelect a folder.
pSee page 201 for displaying
Messages R/F.
c(
Select a mail message.
Mail
to check it. Also, you can press m(
)/
) or >/< to scroll page by page.
pWhen a melody is attached, it is played back
automatically. (You can change this setting by âAuto
melody playâ.)
pSee page 110 for FeelďźMail.
Display Mail from Outbox
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages
including SMS messages.
You can check the sent i-mode mail messages and
SMS messages.
lOutboxSelect a folder.
Outbox Folder List
186
) or >/< to scroll page by page.
Display Mail from Draft
lDraft
Detailed Received Mail
display
pWhen you select an unread mail message, â
(pink)â
changes to â
â.
pUse No to check other mail messages.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display
c(
)/
You can edit and send i-mode mail messages and SMS
messages in the Draft.
You can save up to 20 i-mode mail messages including
SMS messages.
Inbox List
Detailed Sent Mail display
to check it. Also, you can press m(
Inbox Folder List
Outbox List
pUse No to check other mail messages.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display
Draft List
Select a mail message.
When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 2 on
page 172. When you have selected an SMS message, go
to step 2 on page 206.
Information
pWhen you select the i-Îąppli mail folder, the mail-linked
i-Îąppli that supports the folder starts.
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed Display
â Mail menu
Icons might have the following marks:
Unread mail messages or messages are saved in the Inbox.
Failed-to-send mail messages are saved in the Outbox.
Draft mail messages are saved in the Draft.
âMail securityâ is activated. (displayed also for chat mail)
â Inbox Folder List
Folder status
â
â appears when unread messages are found, and â â appears when Mail Security is activated.
Ordinary folder
i-Îąppli mail folder
Message R folder
Message F folder
Trash box folder
Mail
Folder name
â Inbox List and detailed Received Mail display
Mail status and type
â â appears when protection is set.
(pink)
Unread mail
Read mail
Forwarded mail
Replied mail
Area Mail
Type of the received
mail
(for detailed display
only)
Inbox List
For âDate+sender/
receiver subjectâ
Inbox List
For âDate+subjectâ
Detailed Received Mail
display
Received date and time
The Inbox List shows the time for the mail received today, and shows the date for the mail received until yesterday.
The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was received. The Japanese date and time the mail was received from
the Center is displayed.
Phone number or mail address of the sender or of another recipient of simultaneous mail
Senderâs mail address (for detailed display only)
Senderâs mail address that cannot be replied to (for detailed display only)
Recipientâs mail addresses of simultaneous mail (for detailed display only)
Recipientâs mail addresses of simultaneous mail that cannot be replied to (for detailed display only)
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
187
Subject
When âMail list displayâ is set to âDate+sender/receiver subjectâ, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch
characters. When set to âDate+subjectâ, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message
with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages or Area Mail messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (âSMSâ or âArea Mailâ is displayed on the
detailed display.)
In Dual Mode of 2in1, â
â is displayed at the end of the subject or senderâs address of SMS/i-mode mail messages received
to Number B/Address B.
(blue)
SMS messages in the FOMA phone
SMS messages on the UIM
Attached or pasted data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
â â is added to each icon when you execute âDelete att. fileâ (for detailed display only).
Melody file
Bookmark file
Image file
Other files
Inserted image file (for List only)
Attached file before obtaining
(for detailed display only)
i-motion movie file
Mail
PC Movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item file
Attached file suspended to be obtained
(for detailed display only)
Attached file failed to be obtained
(for detailed display only)
i-Îąppli start information (for List only)
i-Îąppli mail (for List only)
Multiple files (for List only)
Multiple pasted files
File set with the UIM restrictions
Attached file
i-Îąppli mail
FeelďźMail icon
See page 110 for FeelďźMail.
Text of mail
188
File set with the UIM restrictions
â Outbox Folder List
Folder status
â â appears when Mail Security is activated.
Ordinary folder
i-Îąppli mail folder
Folder name
â Outbox List and detailed Sent Mail display
Mail status
â â appears when protection is set.
(pink)
Mail successfully sent
Mail failed to be sent
Simultaneous mail
successfully sent to all
addresses
(gray)
Simultaneous mail sent to
some addresses
(pink)
Simultaneous mail failed to
be sent to all addresses
Outbox List
For âDate+sender/
receiver subjectâ
Outbox List
For âDate+subjectâ
Detailed Sent Mail display
Mail
Sent date and time
The Outbox List shows the time for the mail sent today, and shows the date for the mail sent until yesterday.
The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was sent. â
â appears when the date/time is corrected.
Recipientâs phone number or mail address
Mail address successfully sent (for detailed display only)
Mail address failed to be sent (for detailed display only)
Subject
When âMail list displayâ is set to âDate+sender/receiver subjectâ, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch
characters. When set to âDate+subjectâ, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message
with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (âSMSâ is displayed on the detailed display.)
(blue)
SMS messages in the FOMA phone
SMS messages on the UIM
SMS report received [for List (Date+sender/
receiver subject) and detailed display only]
Attached data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
â â is added to each icon when you execute âDelete att. fileâ (for detailed display only).
Melody file
Phonebook entry file
Image file
Schedule event or ToDo item file
Inserted image file (for List only)
Bookmark file
i-motion movie file
Other files
PC Movie file
i-Îąppli mail (for List only)
ToruCa file
Multiple files (for List only)
PDF file
File set with the UIM restrictions
Document file
File set with the UIM restrictions
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Attached file
i-Îąppli mail
Text of mail
189
â Draft List
Mail status
(pink)
Ordinary mail
Simultaneous mail
Saved date and time
The Draft List shows the time for the mail saved today, and shows the
date for the mail saved until yesterday.
â
â appears when the date/time is corrected.
Recipientâs phone number or mail address
When the phone number or mail address is stored in the Phonebook, the
name stored in the Phonebook is displayed.
Subject
For âDate+sender/
For âDate+subjectâ
receiver subjectâ
When âMail list displayâ is set to âDate+sender/receiver subjectâ, the
subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to âDate+subjectâ, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14
half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as
the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
(blue)
SMS messages
Mail
Attached data
Melody file
Document file
Image file
Phonebook entry file
Inserted image file
Schedule event or ToDo item file
i-motion movie file
Bookmark file
PC Movie file
Other files
ToruCa file
Multiple files (for List only)
PDF file
File set with the UIM restrictions
Attached file
File set with the UIM restrictions
Text of mail
Information
pSee âMail list displayâ on page 198 to change a method to display the Inbox/Outbox/Draft List.
pWhen âName in phonebookâ of âMail list displayâ is checked, the name stored in the Phonebook is displayed as sender or
recipient. However, when the senderâs mail address is âphone number@docomo.ne.jpâ, the name is not displayed even when
âphone number@docomo.ne.jpâ is stored in the mail address field in a Phonebook entry. Store the phone number part only to
display the name. When a senderâs/recipientâs phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry stored as secret
data, the name is not displayed. It is displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only.
Even when a senderâs/recipientâs phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry not stored as secret data, the
name is not displayed in Secret Data Only. Switch to Secret Mode or release Secret Data Only to display the name.
pWhen âMessageâ of âMail list displayâ is not checked, the text does not appear on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft List.
190
Managing Mail Messages
Function Menu of the Inbox Folder List/Outbox Folder List
Function menu
Function menu
No. of
messages
You can display the number of stored
received mail messages, Messages R/F, and
sent mail messages.
Delete
(DEL all read
mails)
[Inbox Folder
only]
You can delete all the read mail messages
including secret mail in all Inbox folders. All
the read SMS messages on the UIM are
deleted as well.
DEL all read mailsYES
Delete
(DEL all recv.
mails)
[Inbox Folder
only]
You can delete all the mail messages including
secret mail in all Inbox folders. All the received
SMS messages on the UIM are deleted as well.
DEL all recv. mailsEnter your
Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all sent
mails
[Outbox Folder
only]
You can delete all the mail messages
including secret mail in all Outbox folders.
All sent SMS messages on the UIM are
deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Operation/Explanation
Operate folder You can add a new folder. You can add up to
(Add folder) 22 folders to each of âInboxâ and âOutboxâ.
Add folderEnter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters.
Operate folder You can edit the names of the added folders
(Edit folder
only.
name)
Edit folder nameEdit the folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters.
Operate folder You can sort folders. You can sort only the
(Sort folder) added folders and the i-Îąppli mail folders.
Sort folderUse Bo to sort the order
of the foldersOo(
Open folder
You can display the mail messages in the
i-Îąppli mail folder without running mail-linked
i-Îąppli.
Read all
[Inbox Folder
only]
You can change unread mail in the folder to
read mail.
YES
Sort
(Auto-sort)
See page 196.
Sort
(Re-sort)
You can resort mail messages following the
sorting conditions specified by âAuto-sort.â
Re-sortYES
pWhen the folder applied with Mail security
(see page 191) is found, you need to enter
your Terminal Security Code.
Information
pYou cannot delete an i-Îąppli mail folder if corresponding
mail-linked i-Îąppli exists.
If the software program does not exist, you can delete the
i-Îąppli mail folder, but this will delete both folders created in
the Outbox Folder List and Inbox Folder List.
Mail
Operate folder All the mail messages including secret mail in
(Delete folder) the folder will be deleted as well.
Delete folderEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES
Operation/Explanation
pYou cannot re-sort the mail messages in the âChatâ folder
and âTrash boxâ folder.
pMail messages which are not applied with âAuto-sortâ are
sorted into the âInboxâ folder.
pYou can neither delete the Mail-Security-activated folder nor
edit its name.
Function Menu of the Inbox List/Outbox List/Draft List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Mail security You can set the folder to open only when you
enter your Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pTo release it, perform the same operation.
Reply/forward See page 184.
(Reply)
[Inbox only]
Ir/
See page 305.
transmission
(Send all Ir data)
Reply/forward See page 184.
(Reply with
quote)
[Inbox only]
Ir/
See page 307.
transmission
(All
transmission)
Reply/forward See page 184.
(Forward)
[Inbox only]
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
191
Mail
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Edit
[Outbox only]
You can re-edit the sent mail message and
send it again.
When you have selected an i-mode mail
message, go to step 2 on page 17
2.
When you have selected an SMS message,
go to step 2 on page 206.
Protect
(Protect ON/
OFF)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can protect the mail message so that it is
not overwritten and deleted. You can protect
all the received and sent messages. (2,5
00
received messages, 1,000 sent messages)
The protected one is indicated by â â.
Protect ON/OFF
pTo release protection, perform the same
operation.
pYou can switch between protected and
unprotected also by pressing 1 from the
detailed Received Mail display or detailed
Sent Mail display.
Protect
(ProtectSLCT.
ON/OFF)
[Inbox/Outbox]
ProtectSLCT. ON/OFFPut/Remove a
check mark for mail messages to be
protected/unprotectedl(
pA check mark is placed to the mail already
protected.
Move/copy
MoveSelect a destination folder
(Move)
Put a check mark for mail messages to
[Inbox/Outbox] be movedl(
)YES
Move/copy
You can move mail messages to the âTrash
(Move to trash) boxâ folder. The mail messages moved to the
[Inbox only]
âTrash boxâ folder are preferentially
overwritten (deleted).
Move to trashPut a check mark for
mail messages to be moved to the trash
boxl(
)YES
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Search/sort
(Search
sender/Search
receiver)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a mail
address or phone number of a sender or
recipient.
âSearch senderâ for received mail and âSearch
receiverâ for sent mail are displayed respectively.
Search mailSearch sender or Search
receiverSelect an item.
Phonebook
. . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Received address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Sent address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Enter address
. . . Enter the mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 05 half-pitch characters.
Search/sort
(Search
subject)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject.
Search mailSearch subject
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200
half-pitch characters.
Search/sort
(Search
subject+msg)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a
subject or text.
Search mailSearch subject+msg
Enter a part of a subject or text.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200
half-pitch characters.
Search/sort You can change the order of displayed mail
(Sort)
messages.
[Inbox/Outbox] SortSelect an order.
You can copy or move the mail message to
Move/copy
6)
(UIM operation) the UIM or FOMA phone. (See page 34
[Inbox/Outbox]
Search/sort You can display the mail messages only that
satisfy the condition.
(Filter)
[Inbox/Outbox] FilterSelect a type.
Move/copy
(Copy to
microSD)
See page 295
Move/copy
(Store in
Center)
You can save mail messages stored in FOMA
phone to the Data Storage Center.
Data Security Service is a pay service that is
available on a subscription basis.
Store in Center
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for mail messages to
be savedl(
)YES
pYou can select up to 10 mail messages.
pYou do not need to put a check mark for the
mail messages on the detailed Received
Mail display and detailed Sent Mail display.
Search/sort You can re-display all mail messages in âBy
(Display all) dateââ order after using Search Mail, or the
[Inbox/Outbox] Sort or Filter function.
Display all
192
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Mail history You can display the history of sent/received
[Inbox/Outbox] mail from the sender or to the recipient being
selected or displayed. Up to 1,000 histories
are displayed in the chronological order from
the most recent one.
Select a senderâs or destination address.
The target sent/received mail histories are
displayed.
. . . Sent mail
. . . Received mail
pSelect a history; then you can bring up the
detailed Received Mail display or detailed
Sent Mail display. Press r to return to
the former display.
pYou can display also by pressing 7 on
the detailed Received Mail display or
detailed Sent Mail display.
Color label
You can color the characters on the Inbox List
[Inbox/Outbox] and Outbox List for classifying mail. Select
âDefaultâ to set ordinary character color.
Select a color.
You can select the item to be displayed on the
List. You can also switch between the name
stored in the Phonebook and the mail
address/phone number for the display in the
senderâs/destination address field.
You can list the mail messages by the subject
depending on the setting of âMail list displayâ.
Select an item to be displayed.
pYou can switch each time you press
c(
).
Ir/
See page 305
transmission
(Send Ir data)
Ir/
See page 305
transmission
(Send all Ir data)
[Draft only]
Ir/
See page 306.
transmission
transmission)
Ir/
See page 307
transmission
(All
transmission)
[Draft only]
No. of
messages
You can display the number of stored
received mail messages, sent mail messages
and draft mail messages.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete
selected)
Delete selectedPut a check mark for
mail messages to be deletedl(
YES
Operation/Explanation
Delete
(Delete read
mails)
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the read mail messages in
the folder.
Delete read mailsYES
Delete
(Delete all
SMS-R)
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the SMS reports. While
displaying SMS reports using the Search Mail
function or Filter function, only the displayed
SMS reports are deleted.
Delete all SMS-REnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES
Delete
(DEL all frm
folder)
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can delete all mail messages in the
folder.
DEL all frm folderEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES
Delete
(Delete all)
[Draft only]
You can delete all mail messages in the folder
in Outbox, or delete all mail messages in Draft.
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security
CodeYES
Information
pTo use âMail groupâ for destination addresses, delete all the
entered addresses, press +l(
) to complete the
deletion, and then re-select the address field.
pYou cannot protect mail messages in the âTrash boxâ folder.
pIf you protect all the sent messages which are stored to the
maximum, you can no longer compose i-mode mail
messages.
pIf you move unread mail to the Trash box, it changes to read
mail.
pYou cannot save the SMS messages stored on the UIM.
pYou cannot save the files attached to mail.
pYou cannot use Data Security Service when you are out of
the service area.
pWhen you have not signed up for Data Security Service, the
message to that effect appears.
pYou can download the mail messages saved to the Data
Security Center from its site to your FOMA phone. For
details, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
pEven if you set âNo titleâ for âSearch subjectâ of âSearch
mailâ, you cannot search for the i-mode mail whose subject
is not entered and displayed as âNo titleâ.
pColor Label applied to the mail messages is released when
they are copied to the microSD memory card, copied/moved
to the UIM, copied/moved from the UIM or sent via infrared
rays or iC transmission.
pColor Label applied to the SMS messages on the UIM is
released when the UIM is dismounted and then mounted.
193
Mail
List setting
Function menu
Function Menu of the Detailed Received Mail
Display/Detailed Sent Mail Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Reply/forward See page 184.
(Reply)
[Received Mail
only]
Reply/forward See page 184.
(Reply with
quote)
[Received Mail
only]
Reply/forward See page 184.
(Forward)
[Received Mail
only]
Mail
See page 192.
Edit
[Sent Mail only]
Resend
You can re-send the sent mail message.
[Sent Mail only] YES
Protect ON/
OFF
See page 192.
Move/copy
(Copy)
CopySelect an item to be copied.
pSee page 360 for how to copy.
pWhen the addresses of the sender and another
recipient of simultaneous mail are found or the
multiple destination addresses are found, select
a mail address or phone number to be copied.
Move/copy
(Move)
MoveSelect a destination folder.
You can move the mail to the âTrash boxâ
Move/copy
(Move to trash) folder. The mail messages moved to the
[Received Mail âTrash boxâ folder are preferentially
only]
overwritten (deleted).
Move to trashYES
Move/copy
You can copy or move the mail to the UIM or
(UIM operation) FOMA phone. (See page 346)
Move/copy
(Copy to
microSD)
See page 295.
Move/copy
(Store in
Center)
See page 192.
Operate file See page 185.
(Save
attached file)
Operate file
(Save insert
image
194
See page 179.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Operate file
(Save
D-pictograph)
[Received Mail
only]
You can save Decomail-pictographs in the mail
text at once. You can save up to 20 of them.
Save D-pictographYES
pSee page 162 for when the Decomailpictographs are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 274 for how to check the stored
Decomail-pictographs.
Operate file
(Save as
template)
You can save the sent/received Deco-mail as
a template.
Save as templateYES
pSee page 162 for when the templates are
stored to the maximum.
pSee page 178 for how to check the stored
template.
Operate file
(Property)
You can display the file name and file size of
the image inserted into the text.
PropertySelect an image.
Operate file Delete att. fileYES
(Delete att. file)
Store
See page 87.
(Store address)
Store
(Add to
phonebook)
See page 87.
Store
(Auto-sort)
You can store a sender or subject as a sort
condition. (See page 196)
Store
See page 114.
(Add desktop
icon)
Mail history
See page 193.
Color label
See page 193.
Display
You can display the senderâs/destination
(Name/address) address by the name stored in the Phonebook
or by the mail address/phone number.
Name/address
pYou can switch also by pressing 5.
Display
(Scroll)
See page 198.
Display
See page 115.
(Character size)
Display SMS You can check the result of the SMS
message you sent, or the date and time it
report
[Sent Mail only] arrived at the destination. To receive the SMS
report, set âSMS report requestâ to âONâ.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Ir/
See page 305.
transmission
(Send Ir data)
Ir/
See page 306.
transmission
transmission)
Delete
YES
pYou can delete the mail message also by
pressing 0.
Information
pIf you re-send a failed-to-send mail message, it is saved as
the sent mail message. If you re-send the failed-to-send
simultaneous message to all addresses, it is saved as the
sent mail message.
< Sent Address> < Received Address>
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
When Using Sent Address
Press and hold Vo for at least one second.
:SMS message
successfully sent
:i-mode mail successfully
sent
:SMS message failed to be
Sent Address List
sent
:i-mode mail failed to be sent
:Time-difference corrected time
pPress m(
) from the Sent Address List to
display Redial. When the Sent Address List is displayed
) to display
from Dialed Calls, you can press m(
Dialed Calls.
When Using Received Address
Press and hold Co for at least one second.
The detailed display of the Address List is displayed.
pWith an SMS message for which the other partyâs
phone number is not notified, the reason for no caller ID
is displayed.
pTo send i-mode mail to the displayed address, press
Oo(
) and go to step 3 on page 172.
To send an SMS message to the displayed phone
) and go to step 3 of
number, press Oo(
âComposing SMS Messages to Sendâ on page 206.
pTo store in the Phonebook, press m(
). Go to
step 2 of âStoring Displayed Phone Number/Mail
Address in Phonebookâ on page 88.
Function Menu while Sent/Received Address is
Displayed
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Character size You can switch the character size for the list.
pThe setting here applies to âDialed/recv.
callsâ of âCharacter sizeâ.
See page 110.
FeelďźMail
[Received
Address only]
Add to
phonebook
See page 87.
Add desktop See page 114.
icon
Compose
message
You can compose i-mode mail. The mail
address is entered in the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 172.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message. The
phone number is entered into the address field.
Go to step 3 of âComposing SMS Messages
to Sendâ on page 206.
Dialing
If the mail address has been stored in a
Phonebook entry, you can make a voice call,
videophone call or PushTalk call to the phone
number stored in the Phonebook.
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select âSelect imageâ, select an
image to be sent to the other party during a
videophone call. To cancel the setting,
select âReleaseâ.
pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in
a Phonebook entry, you can dial the first
phone number.
Dial
pTo make an international call, select âIntâl
dial assistâ, select an international call
access code, and follow the procedure
above after selecting âDialingâ from the
Function menu. (See page 58)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select âNotify
caller IDâ. (See step 2 on page 47)
195
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
:SMS message
:i-mode mail
:Time-difference corrected time
:SMS/i-mode mail message
received to Number B/
Received Address List
Address B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
pPress m(
) on the Received Address List to
display Received Calls.
Select a record to be displayed.
Mail
Sent and received i-mode mail messages and SMS
messages are stored in Sent Address and Received
Address, up to 30 messages each. You can check the
List for the mail addresses and phone numbers. When
you exchange mail messages with the same mail
address or phone number, the older one is stored.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 60 records for Number A/
Address A and Number B/Address B are stored in Received
Address in total.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
You can display the Redial List or the Dialed
Redial/
Dialed calls Call List.
[Sent Address
only]
Received calls You can display the Received Call List.
[Received
All received calls (all calls) are displayed.
Address only]
Delete this
YES
Delete
selected
Put a check mark for records to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
< Auto-sort>
Sorting Mail Automatically to
Each Folder
Mail
You can automatically save the mail messages that
satisfy the set conditions to the specified folder. This
function applies to only the added folders and i-Îąppli
mail folders.
Inbox Folder List/Outbox Folder List
i(
)SortAuto-sort
Follow the operation of the Function menu list on
page 196 to set âAuto-sortâ.
If you select a folder for which Auto-sort conditions have
been set, the Auto-sort Setting display appears.
Auto-sort Storing
You can specify a sort condition and folder from the
detailed Sent/Received Mail display.
Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received
Mail displayi(
)Store
Auto-sortDo the following operations.
Item
Operation/Explanation
Address sort You can set the displayed senderâs/recipientâs
address for a sorting condition.
Select a folder.
pWhen multiple addresses are found, select
an address.
Subject sort
You can edit the displayed subject and set it
for a sorting condition.
Edit the subjectSelect a folder.
â To change the condition
The confirmation display appears asking whether to replace
or overwrite.
Select âYESâ to replace the set condition with the new one.
196
â When the same condition is set for another folder
The confirmation display appears asking whether to change.
Select âYESâ to release the condition set for another folder
and to set for the selected folder.
pYou cannot change the setting for a Mail-Security-activated
folder.
â When storing another address for the folder set for
âAddress sortâ
The confirmation display appears asking whether to add the
address.
Information
pYou can store a total of 700 addresses in all folders.
pWhen multiple conditions match, sorting is done in the
priority below.
Sort all
Subject sort
Reply impossible/Send impossible
Address sort (Look-up address/Enter address)
Address sort (Look-up mail group)
Address sort (Look-up group)
pMail messages sent simultaneously to multiple members
cannot be sorted by âAddress sortâ or âSend impossibleâ.
pArea Mail messages are not sorted by âAddress sortâ or
âSubject sortâ.
Function Menu of the Auto-sort Setting Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Address sort You can look up a mail address or phone
(Look-up
number in the Phonebook or Sent/Received
address)
Address and set it to the folder for sorting.
Look-up addressSelect an item.
Phonebook
. . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address
. . . .Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Received address
. . . .Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Address sort You can set a group to be sorted into the
(Look-up
folder.
Look-up groupSelect a group.
group)
Address sort You can set a mail group to be sorted into the
(Look-up mail folder.
Look-up mail group
group)
Select a mail group.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Address sort You can directly enter a mail address or
(Enter
phone number to be sorted into the folder.
Enter address
address)
Enter a mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the mail address is âphone
number@docomo.ne.jpâ, enter the phone
number only. You can sort SMS messages
as well if you enter the phone number only.
You can enter the subject of i-mode mail
messages to be sorted into the folder. One
subject can be set per folder.
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200
half-pitch characters.
Reply
impossible
You can set reply-disabled mail messages to
be sorted. You can set for only one folder.
Send
impossible
You can set failed-to-send mail messages to
be sorted. You can set for only one folder.
Sort all
You can sort all mail messages into the i-Îąppli
mail folder. You can set for only one i-Îąppli
mail folder each in the Inbox and Outbox.
When âSort allâ is set, other sort settings are
disabled.
YES
Edit addr/subj You can edit and store the mail address,
phone number, and subject set for the folder.
Edit the mail address, phone number or
subject.
List setting
Release
(Release all)
< Mail Group>
You can select mail addresses or phone
numbers, and release the sort condition for
them. (The items are deleted from the
Auto-sort Setting display.)
Release selectedPut a check mark for
mail addresses or phone numbers to be
releasedl(
)YES
You can release all sort conditions. (The
items are deleted from the Auto-sort Setting
display.)
Release allYES
+m-2-6
Creating Mail Group
You can store mail addresses by group. You can send
mail to regular destinations.
You can store up to five addresses per group, and up to
20 groups.
You can switch whether to display the
destinations by the name stored in the
Phonebook or by the mail address or phone
number.
Name or Address
pYou can switch also by pressing s.
Release
You can release the sort condition. (The item
(Release this) is deleted from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
Release thisYES
Release
(Release
selected)
pYou cannot sort SMS reports or SMS messages that have
been directly received on the UIM.
mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Mail group
Select a Mail group to be stored.
pWhen mail addresses are stored
in a Mail group, â
â
appears at the lower left of the
Mail Group List
) to
display. Press l(
compose i-mode mail to a selected Mail group set as
the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 172.
Highlight and pressl(
).
pIf you select a stored mail
address, the Mail Group Address
Confirmation display appears.
Detailed Mail Group
display
Enter a mail address.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
Repeat step 2 and step 3 to store multiple mail
addresses.
197
Mail
Subject sort
Information
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, â
â is added to the front
of group name.
pYou cannot set groups on the UIM.
pThe secret mail messages received in ordinary mode (not in
âSecret modeâ or âSecret data onlyâ) are not sorted into the
folder.
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, â
â is added to the front
of mail group name.
pWhen the subject matches sort conditions for multiple
folders, it is sorted to the folder nearest to the âInboxâ folder
or âOutboxâ folder.
pEven if you set âNo titleâ, the i-mode mail titled with âNo titleâ
because of no entry cannot be sorted.
pSMS messages cannot be sorted by subject.
Function Menu of the Mail Group List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Item
Operation/Explanation
Mail list
display
You can set items to be displayed on the
Inbox/Outbox/Draft List by using radio buttons
or check boxes.
Select a display formatl(
Compose
message
You can compose i-mode mail to the Mail group.
Go to step 3 on page 172.
Edit group
name
Enter a name of the Mail group.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters.
Message
display
You can set whether to display received mail in
standard display (from the top) or from the text.
Standard or From message
Reset group
name
You can reset the name of Mail group to the
default.
YES
Mail blind
You can show the characters on the detailed
mail display and Message Composition display
in gray to make them hard to see from persons
around you. (The characters on the Character
Entry display are not shown in gray.)
ON or OFF
pPress and hold 8 for at least one second
while sent or received mail is displayed.
Function Menu of the Detailed Mail Group Display/
Mail Group Address Confirmation Display
Function menu
Edit address
Operation/Explanation
Go to step 3 on page 197.
pYou can edit the address also by pressing
l(
).
You can call up a phone number or mail
address in the Phonebook, Sent Address, or
Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook
. . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
).
and press Oo(
Received address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Delete this
YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Mail
Look-up
address
< Mail Settings>
Setting Mail and Messages R/F
lMail settings
Do the following operations.
Item
Scroll
Operation/Explanation
You can set the number of lines that are
scrolled at a time for when you press Bo on
the detailed mail display, detailed Message R/
F display, Message Composition display and
preview display.
Select the number of lines.
Character size See page 115.
198
Mail security See page 126.
Secret mail
display
See page 126.
Auto color
label
You can specify the text color of the sender,
received date/time and others on the Inbox
List by mail address. You can store up to 10
items.
Select an item.
Phonebook
. . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Received address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Enter address
. . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pTo change the set color, press i(
and select âSelect colorâ.
pTo delete the set item, press i(
and select âDeleteâââDelete thisâ or âDelete
allâ and select âYESâ. If you select âDelete
allâ, you need to enter your Terminal
Security Code.
Select a color.
Pred. conv. at You can set whether to preferentially display
reply
the words contained in the subject and text of
the received mail message as conversion
candidates when you reply to, reply with
quote to, or forward it.
ON or OFF
Item
Header/
signature
Operation/Explanation
See page 199.
Set check new You can select items to be checked from
message
among i-mode mail, Message R and Message
F, for when you perform âCheck new
messageâ.
Put a check mark for the items to be
checkedl(
Auto-display See page 200.
Receiving
display
Receive
See page 183.
option setting
Attachment
preference
You can set whether to receive the attached
file with an i-mode mail message. The
attached files for which you remove a check
mark are held at the i-mode Center.
(The file in excess of 100 Kbytes is held at the
i-mode Center, even if you put a check mark
for it.)
Put a check mark for items to be received
l(
pPut a check mark for âTool dataâ to receive
Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo
items, and bookmarks.
pPut a check mark for âOtherâ to receive PC
movies, document files, and files
unsupported by the FOMA phone.
pEven when you set this function, the text color of the mail
message already received does not change.
p If you do not want to receive Messages R and Messages F
by âCheck new messageâ, change these settings to â
â.
pYou cannot play back attached or pasted melodies during
Play Background regardless of the setting of âAuto melody
playâ.
Header/Signature
You can store a header, signature and quotation mark.
Also, you can set whether to automatically paste the
header or signature.
lMail settingsHeader/signature
Do the following operations.
Item
Photo auto
display
Chat setting
You can set whether to automatically display
the photo (still image) received during a call.
ON or OFF
See page 205.
Check settings You can check each of âMail settingsâ.
Operation/Explanation
The header is the sentence such as greeting
at the beginning of the text.
Select the header fieldEnter a header
l(
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000
half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not want the header to be pasted
automatically, select âInsertâ to change
â
â to â
â. See page 174 for adding a
header by mail message.
Signature
The signature is your name and other
information, placed at the end of the text.
Select the signature field
Enter a signaturel(
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000
half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not want the signature to be pasted
automatically, select âInsertâ to change
â
â to â
â. See page 174 for adding a
signature by mail message.
Quotation
marks
The quotation mark is the symbol indicating a
quotation from received mail for when you
reply to mail.
Enter a quotation mark.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters.
Information
pYou can set decorations in a header and signature.
199
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Header
Auto melody You can set whether to play back the
play
attached or pasted melodies automatically for
when you display the text of received mail, or
message R/F.
ON or OFF
Mail
You can set whether to display the Message
Receiving and Reception Result displays,
even during operation of another function.
Alarm preferred or Operation preferred
Alarm preferred
. . . Prioritizes the Message Receiving and
Reception Result displays when you have
new mail.
Operation preferred
. . . Prioritizes the display of the current
operation when you have new mail.
Information
pEven if âFrom messageâ is set, the message might not be
displayed from the text depending on the number of
characters in the text.
pPictographs, Decomail-pictographs, and Deco-mail
messages are not displayed in gray.
Information
pEven if you have put a check mark for âInsertâ, the header and
signature cannot be pasted when you compose i-mode mail
for Photo-sending during a call or from a template or i-Îąppli.
pYou cannot paste headers, signatures or the quotation
marks to SMS messages.
< Receive Message R/F>
Receiving Messages R/F
Automatically
Message services automatically deliver information
you want to your FOMA phone.
When your FOMA phone is in the service area, it
receives Messages R/F automatically from the i-mode
Center.
â (white)â or â (white)â appears at the top of the
display when a Message R/F is delivered.
You can save up to 100 each of received Messages R/F.
Mail
When you receive a Message R/F, the
â (white)â or â (white)â blinks and the
message for receiving the Message R/F
appears.
After the message is received, the
number of received mail messages
and Messages R/F is displayed.
pYou can display the Message
R/F List by selecting âMessageRâ or âMessageFâ.
pIf âAuto-displayâ is set to other than âOFFâ, the contents
of received Message R/F are displayed automatically.
They are displayed for 15 seconds when âMail/Msg. ring
timeâ is set to 0 through 10 seconds, or for the specified
duration plus 5 seconds when it is set to 11 seconds or
longer.
pIf no keys are pressed for the specified duration, â
â
or â
â (see page 112) appears on the desktop and
the former display returns. (The transit time varies
depending on the setting for âMail/Msg. ring timeâ.)
â or â
â, and press
Press Oo, highlight â
Oo(
) to display the Message R/F List.
pSee page 30 for when the FOMA phone is closed.
â When unread Messages R/F are found
â
â is added to âMessage R/Fâ of i-mode menu.
Information
pReceived Messages R/F are not displayed automatically
while displaying the screen other than the Stand-by display,
while i-Îąppli is running, or during Public Mode (Drive Mode),
Lock All, or Personal Data Lock.
pWhen the number of Message R/F exceeds the maximum
of storage, they will be overwritten starting from the oldest
Message R/F. Unread or protected Messages R/F are not
overwritten.
200
Information
pWhen the FOMA phone cannot receive any more Messages
R/F, â (black)â or â (black)â is displayed. Delete
unnecessary Messages R/F, read unread Messages R/F or
release protection.
pWhen the icon â (white)â or â (white)â is displayed, the
i-mode Center holds Messages R/F. When the icon
â (black)â or â (black)â is displayed, the i-mode Center
can hold no more Messages R/F. Perform âCheck new
messageâ to receive them.
pAfter being displayed automatically, Messages R/F are still
displayed as unread ones in the Message R/F List.
However, if you scroll through the messages while they are
being displayed automatically, they will be indicated as
read.
pMessages R/F for you are held at the i-mode Center in the
following cases:
ăťWhen the power is off
ăťDuring a videophone call
ăťDuring Self Mode
ăťWhen you are out of the service area
ăťDuring infrared data exchange
ăťWhile connecting to the FirstPass Center
ăťDuring PushTalk communication
ăťDuring Omakase Lock
ăťDuring iC communication
ăťDuring copy to microSD
ăťWhile connecting to the Data Storage Center
ăťWhen the space for Messages R/F is full with protected or
unread messages
Auto-display
You can set how to automatically display Messages R/F
received during standby.
lMail settingsAuto-display
Select an option for automatic display.
Information
pThe Messages R/F are not displayed automatically when
âMail securityâ is set for âInboxâ, or when âMail securityâ is
set for âMessageRâ folder or âMessageFâ folder.
< Display Message R/F>
Reading Received Messages R/F
lInboxMessageR or MessageF
Select a Message R/F to be displayed.
Text of message
The phone number stored in the Phonebook is displayed as
the name stored in the Phonebook.
Function Menu of the Message R/F List
Function menu
Protect
(Protect ON/
OFF)
Message R/F List
Detailed Message R/F
display
pYou can display Messages R/F also by
âiMessage R/FMessageR or MessageFâ.
pWhen you select an unread Message R/F, â
(pink)â
changes to â
â.
pUse No to check other Messages R/F.
pWhen the text of Message R/F is long, use Bo to scroll
the display to check it. Also, you can press
m(
)/c(
) or > to scroll page by
You can rearrange the displaying order.
SortSelect a displaying order.
Search/sort
(Filter)
You can display only Messages R/F that
satisfy the condition.
FilterSelect a displaying type.
Search/sort
(Display all)
After you execute âSortâ or âFilterâ, you can
reset it and list all Messages R/F by âBy date
ââ.
Display all
No. of
messages
You can display the total number of
Messages R/F stored in the FOMA phone, as
well as the number of unread messages and
protected messages.
Message R/F List
Detailed Message R/F
display
Status of Message R/F
â â appears when protection is set.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
(pink)
Unread Message R/F
Delete
(Delete
selected)
Delete selectedPut a check mark for
Messages R/F to be deletedl(
YES
Read Message R/F
Received date and time
The list shows the time for the Message R/F received today,
and shows the date for the Message R/F received until
yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the
Message R/F was received.
Subject
The data attached or pasted
The detailed display shows the data volume.
Valid melody file
Valid image file
Valid ToruCa file
Delete
(Delete read
mails)
You can delete all read Messages R/F.
Delete read mailsYES
Delete
(DEL all frm
folder)
You can delete all Messages R/F.
DEL all frm folderEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES
Multiple attached files
Multiple pasted files
File set with the UIM restrictions
Mail
Search/sort
(Sort)
You can protect a Message R/F not to be
overwritten or deleted.
You can protect up to 50 messages (Message
R and Message F each).
Protected messages are indicated by â â.
Protect ON/OFF
pTo release protection, perform the same
operation.
Protect
Unprotect allYES
(Unprotect all)
page.
â Message R/F List and Detailed Message R/F Display
Operation/Explanation
Information
pTo return to the former status, execute âDisplay allâ.
pIf you close the List and re-open it, you can return to the List
of all items.
Function Menu of the Detailed Message R/F Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Protect ON/OFF See page 201.
201
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Operate file You can save attached or pasted files.(See
(Save attached page 185)
file)
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Operate file
(Save insert
image)
You can save the attached image and set it as
the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or
another display. (See page 179)
Operate file
(Save BG
image)
Save BG imageYES
Select a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 159.
Operate file You can save the all Decomail-pictographs
(Save
inserted into the text. (See page 194)
D-pictograph)
Add to
phonebook
See page 87.
Delete
YES
Mail
What is Area Mail?
This service enables you to receive reports such as
emergency earthquake alerts distributed from the
Japan Meteorological Agency.
pYou can receive Area Mail without i-mode contract.
pYou need to set âReceive settingâ to receive Area Mail.
âťSee page 202 for âReceive settingâ of Area Mail.
pYou might not be able to receive Area Mail in the following cases:
ăťDuring a call (voice call/videophone call)
ăťDuring packet communication (i-mode communication,
data communication, PushTalk communication)
ăťDuring updating software program
pYou cannot receive Area Mail messages in the following cases:
ăťDuring Omakase Lock
ăťDuring international roaming
ăťDuring Self Mode
âťWhen you could not receive the messages by the reasons
above, you cannot receive them again.
Receiving Area Mail
When you receive an Area Mail message, the ring tone
for Area Mail sounds. The âRing volumeâ, âRing timeâ,
and âVibratorâ settings follow that of âMailâ.
When you receive an emergency earthquake alert, a
dedicated buzzer (alarm) sounds, and the vibrator
works to notify you. âRing volumeâ is fixed to âLevel
4â, and âVibratorâ is fixed to âPattern 2â, you cannot
change their settings. You can use âArea mail settingsâ
to set âBeep timeâ.
Up to 30 Area Mail messages are saved separately from
i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the Inbox.
When an Area Mail message arrives, â â blinks
and the message telling its arrival appears.
pIf you press any key, the former
display returns. (The transit time
varies depending on the setting for
âMail/Msg. ring timeâ.
Reception Result display
pThe details of some Area Mail
messages might be displayed when you receive them.
To clear it, press Oo, r, or h.
pSee page 186 for displaying Area Mail messages.
202
Information
pThe buzzer sounds when you receive an emergency
earthquake alert with âOriginalâ set to sound any of the
following tones:
ăťMail volume
ăťPhone volume ăťAlarm volume
ăťVM tone
ăťKeypad sound
pEven when âVibratorâ of âOriginal mannerâ is set to âOFFâ, the
vibrator works if you receive an emergency earthquake alert.
pWhen you receive a new Area Mail message with 30 Area
Mail messages saved, the read messages are overwritten
from the oldest. When all 30 messages are not read, they
are overwritten from the oldest one in order.
pWhether the details of a received Area Mail message are
displayed or not depends on the setting by the Area Mail
message provider.
< Area Mail Settings>
Setting Area Mail
lArea mail settings
Do the following operations.
Item
Operation/Explanation
Receive setting You can set whether to use Area Mail.
Read exemption clause thoroughly
Yes or No
Receive entry You can register Message IDs for the reports to
be received other than emergency earthquake
alert. You can register up to 20 IDs.
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Enter a registration name
Enter a Message ID.
pTo edit a registered Message ID, highlight it,
press l(
), and then enter your
Terminal Security Code.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch
characters for a registration name, and enter
4 half-pitch characters for a Message ID.
pYou can edit also by selecting âEditâ from the
Function menu. Select âDelete thisâ to delete
the Message ID, and select âDelete allâ and
enter your Terminal Security Code to delete
all Message IDs.
pYou cannot edit/delete âEmergency
informationâ.
Beep setting
You can set whether to make the beep sound
for when you receive Area Mail message that
beeps.
ON or OFF
pWhen you set âOFFâ, the dedicated ring
tone for Area Mail sounds.
Beep time
You can set the duration the beep sounds.
Enter a beep time (seconds).
pEnter it in two digit, from â01â through â30â.
Function menu
Using Chat Mail
Change
member
(Chat group)
You can store the members stored in a chat
group as chat members.
Chat groupGroup list or Member list
Group list . . . . You can select members by
chat group.
Member list . . . You can select members
from all the members stored
in chat groups.
pIf you select âGroup listâ, select a chat
group.
The members from the selected group are
stored.
pIf you select âMember listâ, check the
members you want to store and press
l(
).
pIf you have already stored chat members,
the confirmation display appears asking
whether to replace all the chat members.
Change
member
(Mail group)
You can store the mail addresses stored in
Mail group as chat members.
Mail groupSelect a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored chat members,
the confirmation display appears asking
whether to replace all the chat members.
Display
setting
You can check the chat memberâs name,
image, background color, and mail address.
pYou can press No to switch members.
pThe mail address of the user (yourself) is
not displayed.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete allYES
You can send or receive chat mail messages to and
from multiple persons on a single display. To use Chat
Mail, you need to store chat members. You can easily
store them by creating chat groups.
Store Chat Members
You can store up to six chat members including the
user (yourself).
lChat maili(
Chat member
Enter a mail address.
pTo edit a stored member, select
the member.
pWhen the mail address is âphone
number@docomo.ne.jpâ, store
the phone number only.
Chat Member List
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
Information
pIf you edit the mail address of the stored member, the
memberâs name and image are changed.
Function Menu of the Chat Member List
Function menu
Edit
Operation/Explanation
You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 1 of âStore Chat Membersâ on
page 203.
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail
address in the Phonebook, Received
Address, or Sent Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook
. . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Received address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Operation/Explanation
Mail
< Chat Mail>
Exchange Chat Mail Messages
lChat mail
Chat Mail display
Oo(
)Enter characters.
pYou can enter up to 250
full-pitch/500 half-pitch
characters.
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
203
3
Press l(
The display for receiving chat mail appears
and a chat mail message is received.
).
The chat mail message is sent.
The sent chat mail message is
displayed at the top of the Chat
Mail display.
The received chat mail message is
displayed at the top of the Chat
Mail display.
Repeat step 2 through step 4 to
send and receive chat mail messages.
Mail
rYES or NO
YES . . You can delete read and sent chat mail message
from the âChatâ folder.
NO . . . You do not delete read and sent chat mail
message from the âChatâ folder.
Chat Mail ends.
pYou can end Chat Mail also by pressing h.
pWhen no sent and received chat mail messages are
found, the confirmation display does not appear.
â Chat Mail display
Image
The image you have
stored in Chat Group is
Current Chat
displayed.
mail
Member name
The chat memberâs name
store in the chat group is
Chat Mail
history
displayed. Also, the
name is displayed with a
specified background
color.
pWhen the name is not
stored in the chat group, up to eight half-pitch characters
from the beginning of the mail address are displayed. When
the mail address is stored in the Phonebook, up to four
full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters from the beginning of the
name are displayed.
Broadcast mark
Displayed when the chat mail message set with multiple
addresses is received.
(blue): All addresses are stored in Chat Member
(dark blue): Addresses that are not stored in Chat
Member are found
Sent/Received date and time
The date and time the chat mail message was sent/received
are displayed. The time is displayed for the chat mail
messages sent/received today and the date for the chat mail
messages sent/received until yesterday.
204
Text
The text of chat mail message is displayed. The number of
characters of the text to be displayed is up to 250 full-pitch/500
half-pitch characters.
If the text exceeds four lines,
is displayed and you can
switch the pages by pressing No.
pYou cannot switch the page of the text on the Chat Mail history.
pThe text of the chat mail message successfully sent is
displayed in black. The text of the chat mail message failed
to be sent is displayed in gray.
Input box
Entered characters (characters to send) are displayed from the
beginning by a factor of one line.
Information
pThe communication fee for when you send chat mail
messages to multiple chat members is the same as for
sending a chat mail message to one member. (However, the
data for the added address fields will involve a higher charge.)
pWhen âReceive option settingâ is set to âONâ, you cannot
execute Chat Mail.
pWhen the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail messages,
you cannot execute Chat Mail. Delete unnecessary mail
messages or read unread mail messages, or release the
protection and then operate.
pAttached files or pasted data are not displayed.
pSent/Received chat mail messages are saved to the âChatâ
folder. (You can change the setting from âAuto-sortâ.)
pThe subject of a sent chat mail message is âăăŁăăăĄăźăŤ (chat
mail)â (half-pitch characters).
pEven when the chat mail text on the Chat Mail display
contains the phone number, mail address, or URL, the
Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, and Web To functions are
not available. However, those functions will be available
when Chat Mail is finished and chat mail message is
brought up from the âInboxâ or âOutboxâ.
pDuring playing back a music file by MUSIC Player, a tone
for the chat mail message does not sound.
If You Receive Chat Mail during Standby
If you receive a chat mail message during standby,
â
â appears on the desktop.
Press Oo, highlight â
â, and press Oo(
);
then Chat Mail starts up.
Information
pMessages are recognized as chat mail messages in the
following cases:
シWhen the senderâs address or destination address is
stored in Chat Member or in a chat group
シWhen the subject contains âăăŁăăăĄăźăŤ (chat mail)â (all
full-pitch or all half-pitch characters)
pEven when you receive a chat mail message from a
member of a chat group other than Chat Member while Chat
Mail is running, â
â appears.
â If you start Chat Mail from the desktop or Chat Group
If you start Chat Mail from a mail address or from a chat group that
is not stored in Chat Member, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to delete stored member and start Chat Mail.
Select âYESâ; then the current chat members are deleted
and the senderâs mail address or chat group members are
stored in Chat Member.
If you start Chat Mail from the desktop
The senderâs mail address is stored in Chat Member. When
the senderâs mail address has been stored in a chat group,
the members in that chat group are stored in Chat Member.
However, the mail address selected as the destination is
only the mail address of the sender.
If you start Chat Mail from Chat Group
The chat group members are stored in Chat Member. All
members of the group are selected as the destination.
Chat Setting
Item
You can set whether to display images on the
Chat Mail display.
ON or OFF
User setting
You can set the name and image of the user
(yourself).
Select the name fieldEnter a user name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight
half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not change the user name, go to
the next step.
You can send the chat mail message.
Select
receiver
From among chat members, you can select
destination addresses to send the chat mail
messages to.
Put a check mark for destination
addresses to send the messages to
l(
Chat member You can store chat members. (See page 203)
Broadcast
address
Reload
You can check the destination addresses you
have simultaneously sent a chat mail
message to.
pWhen there are destination addresses that
are not stored in Chat Member, the
confirmation display appears asking whether
to store them in Chat Member. If you store
them in Chat Member, select âYESâ and put
a check mark for the destination addresses
).
to be stored and press l(
Select the image fieldSelect a folder
Select an image.
< Chat Group>
You can store the mail addresses you want to
exchange chat mail per group.
By storing multiple members in a group, you can set
them as chat members at a time.
You can store up to five mail addresses per group. You
can create up to five groups.
You can delete all the received read chat mail
messages and sent chat mail messages including
secret mail and chat mail messages failed to send.
YES
Highlight and pressl(
pIf you select a stored mail
address, the Chat Group
Address Confirmation display
appears.
).
Detailed Chat Group
display
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Information
pYou can store up to six members (including yourself) in
Chat Member.
mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Chat groupSelect a chat group to be stored.
pWhen the selected chat group has
any member, â
â appears at
the lower left of the display.
), Chat
If you press l(
Chat Group List
group members are stored in Chat
Member and Chat Mail starts. Go to step 2 on page 203.
View first line You can display the latest chat mail message.
Delete read
mails
+m-2-6
Creating Chat Group
You can receive chat mail messages that you
could not automatically receive. If you receive
a new chat mail message, the Chat Mail
display is updated.
View last line You can display the oldest chat mail message.
Mail
Chat image
Operation/Explanation
Send
Operation/Explanation
Sound setting You can set a tone for when you send/receive
a chat mail message on the Chat Mail display.
Select a folderSelect a tone.
pThe tone does not sound when a chat mail
message comes in from a member not
stored in Chat Member.
Function Menu of the Chat Mail Display
Function menu
lMail settingsChat setting
Do the following operations.
205
3
Enter a mail address.
Function menu
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the entered mail address is stored in the
Phonebook, and the image is stored in the Phonebook,
the image is also set.
pWhen the mail address is âphone
number@
docomo.ne.jpâ, store the phone number only.
Repeat step 2 and step 3 to store multiple mail
addresses.
Member
setting
Operation/Explanation
Activate chat The members in the chat group are stored as
chat members and Chat Mail starts.
Go to step 2 on page 203.
Edit group
name
Mail
Reset group
name
Enter a chat group name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters.
Edit
You can reset the name of the chat group to
the default.
YES
Operation/Explanation
You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 3 of âCreating Chat Groupâ on
page 206.
pYou can edit also by pressing l(
206
YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
< Compose SMS>
You can compose and send SMS messages.
You can save up to 1,000 sent SMS messages including
i-mode mail messages to the Outbox.
pYou can send and receive SMS messages to and from
subscribers of overseas carriers other than DoCoMo. For the
countries and overseas carriers available for the service,
refer to the DoCoMo Global Service web page.
pYou can move/copy the sent SMS messages to the UIM.
(See page 34
)5
lCompose SMS
Address field
Text field
).
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail
address in the Phonebook, Sent Address, or
Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook
. . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Received address
. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo(
).
Change
member
Delete
Composing SMS Messages to Send
Function Menu of the Detailed Chat Group
Display/Chat Group Address Confirmation Display
Function menu
You can set the memberâs name and image.
You can switch members by pressing No.
Select the member name field
Enter a memberâs name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight
half-pitch characters.
pNot to change the memberâs name, go to
the next step.
Select the picture fieldSelect a folder
Select an image.
Function Menu of the Chat Group List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
SMS Composition display
Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Select the text fieldEnter text.
You can store members from a Mail group in
the chat group.
Mail groupSelect a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored chat members,
the confirmation display appears asking
whether to replace all the chat members.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and
select a phone number.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number and press
Oo(
).
Received address . . . . Select a phone number and press
Oo(
).
Enter address . . . . . . Enter a phone number.
Only one address can be specified.
pYou can enter up to 21 digits (including â+
â).
pWhen the address is that of overseas carriers other
than DoCoMo, enter â+
â (press and hold 0 for at
least one second), âcountry codeâ, and âdestination
mobile phone numberâ in that order. When the mobile
phone number begins with â0â, enter the phone number
except for the â0â. Also, you can enter â010â, âcountry
codeâ, and âdestination mobile phone numberâ in that
order to send SMS messages. (When you reply to SMS
messages received from overseas, enter â010â.)
pThe number of characters you can enter differs
depending on the âSMS input characterâ.
4
Press l(
).
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
The animation display during transmission appears and
mail is sent.
SMS report req. See page 208.
OK
SMS input char. See page 208.
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters
might not be sent successfully to the destination.
pWhen the number of sent mail messages exceeds the
maximum number of storage, they will be overwritten
starting from the oldest sent mail. However, protected sent
mail cannot be overwritten.
pYou cannot compose an SMS message when the number
of sent mail messages in the Outbox has reached the
maximum and those messages are all protected, or when
20 mail messages are saved to the Draft or the Draft is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/
delete draft mail messages, and then operate again.
SMS valid. per. See page 208.
< Receive SMS>
Receiving SMS Messages
Automatically
You can save up to 2,500 received SMS messages
including i-mode mail messages.
pYou can move/copy the received SMS messages to the UIM.
(See page 34
)5
pIf you set âSMS report requestâ to âONâ, you cannot send
SMS messages to the i-mode phone of the mova service.
pâ+
â is valid only at t he beginning of the address.
pYou cannot send the message to addresses that include
any characters other than numbers, â_â, â#
â and â+
â.
pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose SMS messages.
Information
pWhen the number of unread or protected messages in the
Inbox has reached the maximum, no new messages can be
received and â (black)â is displayed. To receive SMS
messages, delete mail in the Inbox or read unread mail or
release protection until â (black)â clears, and then perform
âCheck new SMSâ.
Function Menu of the SMS Composition Display
Display Newly Received SMS Messages
pYou cannot reply to the SMS message whose sender is
User unset/PublicPhone/Unavailable.
Function menu
Send
Operation/Explanation
You can send the SMS message.
Go to step 5on page 207
Preview
Before sending, you can check the address
and the text contents.
pPress l(
) to send the SMS
message.
Save
You can save the SMS message you are
composing or editing to the Draft.
pYou cannot save the message when the
address field and text field are blank.
Mail
When receiving ends, the display
shows the number of received
SMS messages.
pYou can display the Inbox List by
Reception Result display
selecting âMailâ.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15seconds, â
â
(see page 112) appears on the desktop and the former
display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for âMail/Msg. ring timeâ.)
Press Oo, highlight â
â, and press Oo(
) to
display the Inbox List.
pSee page 30 for when the FOMA phone is closed.
pEven if âActivateâ of âCaller ID notificationâ is set to âOFFâ,
the caller ID is notified to the other party you send an SMS
message to. If you attempt to send an SMS message to the
phone number headed by â184
â/â 186â, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers
and send the mail.
pYou cannot start a new line while editing the text.
pThe special symbols (see page 4
1)4 are replaced by
half-pitch spaces.
pEach space is counted as a character.
When an SMS message arrives, â (white)â
lights and the receiving message is
displayed.
Reception Result displayMail
Select an SMS message to be displayed.
pPress and hold No for at least
one second from the detailed
SMS display to change the size
of text characters. When you set
to âLargeâ, the characters on the
Folder List and the Inbox/Outbox/Draft List are
displayed in large size as well.
207
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Information
pSpaces will be displayed in the received SMS message
depending on the entered characters.
Information
pWhile the senderâs address (phone number) is highlighted in
) to
the displayed SMS message, you can press +Oo(
make a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call to the
displayed number (the Phone To/AV Phone To function).
Further, if the senderâs phone number is stored in the
Phonebook, the stored ânameâ is highlighted. In this case,
you can dial the phone number in the same way.
SMS Validity Period
You can set the period that the SMS Center holds an
SMS message sent but unsuccessfully delivered due to
the out-of-service area, etc.
pIf you select âNoneâ, the stored SMS message is re-sent after
a certain period of time and deleted from the SMS Center.
pWhen you operated from function menu of the SMS
Composition display, the setting here is effective only
for the SMS message you are composing.
pA Short Mail is received as an SMS message on the FOMA
phone. When the sender does not notify the phone number,
the reason is displayed in the senderâs field.
< Check New SMS>
Checking whether Center Holds
SMS Messages
Mail
When SMS messages arrive at the SMS Center, they are
automatically sent to your FOMA phone, but will be
held at the SMS Center if your FOMA phone cannot
receive messages such as when it is off or out of the
service area.
You can receive the messages by âCheck new SMSâ.
SMS Input Character
You can set the characters you can enter into the text
of SMS messages. You can set to enter only half-pitch
alphanumeric characters and half-pitch symbols.
Return
If the Center holds SMS messages, the FOMA phone
automatically receives them.
pWhen â (black)â or â (black)â, etc. are displayed, you
cannot receive any more SMS messages. Delete
unnecessary mail, read unread mail, or release protection.
(Read and unprotected messages are overwritten
automatically from the oldest one.)
pYou cannot use this function to receive i-mode mail or
Messages R/F. Use âCheck new messageâ to receive
i-mode mail or Messages R/F.
< SMS Settings>
Setting SMS
SMS Center Selection
âťNormally, you do not need to change this setting.
You can set the address and âType of numberâ for the
SMS Center.
This setting is for getting any service other than SMS
Service you currently use.
lSMS settingsSMS report request
ON or OFF
pWhen you operate from Function menu of the SMS
Composition display, the setting is effective only for the
SMS message you are composing.
208
lSMS settingsSMS center selection
User settingEnter an address.
pYou can enter up to 20 half-pitch characters.
pYou can reset User Setting to âDoCoMoâ by
ResetEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES.
SMS Report Request
You can set whether to request an SMS report for when
sending an SMS message.
The SMS report lets you know that your SMS message was
delivered to the destination.
You can check received SMS reports in the âInboxâ folder.
lSMS settingsSMS input character
Select an item.
Japanese (70char.)
. . . You can enter full-pitch and half-pitch characters. You
cannot enter pictographs except â â and â â (see
page 411). You can enter up to 70 characters for the text.
English (160char.)
. . .You can enter only half-pitch alphanumeric
characters and half-pitch symbols. You can enter up
to 160 characters for the text.
pWhen you operate from Function menu of the SMS
Composition display, the setting here is effective only
for the SMS message you are composing.
lCheck new SMS
Information
pSome SMS messages are not delivered immediately after
checking.
lSMS settingsSMSvalidity period
Select a holding period.
International or Unknown
pIf â:â or â#â is included in the entered address, you
cannot set it for âInternationalâ.
< Web Mail>
Using Web Mail
You can send mail messages or browse received mail
messages on the i-mode site.
pYou can use only in B Mode or Dual Mode of 2in1.
pFor details on Web mail, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide
[2in1]â.
lWeb mailOperate following the
instructions on the display.
i-Îąppli
What is i-Îąppli? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
Downloading i-Îąppli from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âši-Îąppli Downloadâş
210
Starting i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âši-Îąppli Runâş
211
Setting i-Îąppli. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšiÎąppli Settingsâş
220
Starting i-Îąppli Automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
Operating i-Îąppli Stand-by Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âši-Îąppli Stand-by Displayâş
221
Displaying i-Îąppli Data Files on the microSD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . âšiÎąppli(microSD)âş
222
209
What is i-Îąppli?
By downloading i-Îąppli from i-mode sites, i-mode
phone becomes more convenient. For example, you
can enjoy various games downloaded to your i-mode
phone, and can also use the i-Îąppli which enables you
to directly store the data into the Phonebook or
Schedule, or the i-Îąppli which links to Data Box,
enabling you to save or obtain images.
pFor details on the i-Îąppli, refer to the âMobile Phone Userâs
Guide [i-mode]â.
< i-Îąppli Download>
Downloading i-Îąppli from Sites
You can download software programs from sites to the
FOMA phone. You can save up to 100 files including
other data files, however, the number of files you can
save decreases depending on the data volume. (See
page 444)
Bring up an i-Îąppli downloadable site
Select a software program.
i-Îąppli
Select âOKâ when downloading ends.
pSee page 162 when i-Îąppli programs are stored to the
maximum.
pWhen downloading ends, the display for Software
Setting (Network Set, Stand-by Set, Location Usage, or
Program Guide Key) might appear. Press l(
after the setting is completed. These settings can be
done also from the Software List.
YES or NO
YES . . .Starts i-Îąppli.
NO . . . .Returns to the site display.
â When downloading is suspended
When you press r or h to suspend downloading an
i-Îąppli program of 100 Kbytes or more, or when downloading
is suspended by the radio wave conditions, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to resume downloading.
Select âYESâ to resume downloading the remaining part.
Select âNOâ to show the confirmation display asking whether
to save the file downloaded halfway. Select âYESâ to partially
save the file.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved i-Îąppli
program from the Software List.
210
â When you downloaded mail-linked i-Îąppli
An i-Îąppli mail folder is created automatically each in the
Inbox/Outbox Folder List, and the title of the downloaded
mail-linked i-Îąppli becomes the name of the folder.
pYou can save up to five mail-linked i-Îąppli programs.
pYou cannot download the software program if the
mail-linked i-Îąppli using the same folder is already in the
Software List.
pYou cannot download mail-linked i-Îąppli while Mail
Security is set.
pYou cannot download mail-linked i-Îąppli if the Inbox/
Outbox Folder List contains five i-Îąppli mail folders.
pWhen re-downloading mail-linked i-Îąppli whose folder only
remains, the confirmation display appears asking whether
to use the existing i-Îąppli mail folder. If you select âYESâ,
the existing folder is used. If you select âNOâ because you
do not use it, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to delete an existing folder and create a new one.
You cannot download mail-linked i-Îąppli without creating a
new folder.
Information
pYou can download pre-installed i-Îąppli
from the âP-SQUAREâ site (Japanese
only).
iMenuâăĄăăĽăźďźć¤ç´˘ (Menu/Search)
QR code for
âăąăźăżă¤éťčŠąăĄăźăŤăź (Mobile Phone
accessing the site
Maker)âP-SQUARE
pDownloading is not available at some accessed sites.
pSome i-Îąppli programs can automatically connect to the
i-mode Center after they are downloaded. However, to use
this service, you need to set it in advance in âSoftware
setting (Network set)â.
pâ â appears at the top of the display while software
information or a software program is being downloaded
from SSL pages.
pAt downloading, the confirmation display might appear
asking whether to send the âserial number of your mobile
phone/UIMâ. Select âYESâ to start downloading. In this case,
the âserial number of your mobile phone/UIMâ is sent to the
IP (Information Provider) over the Internet, so could be
deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP
(Information Provider) or others by this operation.
Information
pIf you attempt to re-download the software program that
was downloaded using a different UIM, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to overwrite the software
program. With the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli, the
confirmation display appears telling that the data on the IC
card is to be deleted. Select âYESâ to start downloading.
When downloading ends, the software program that was
downloaded using a different UIM and the data on the IC
card are deleted.
pYou cannot download some software programs while the IC
card function is working or IC Card Lock is activated.
pSome software programs that start immediately after
downloading cannot be saved.
pThe 3D polygonalâť engine enables cubic images to be
displayed in i-Îąppli.
âťBy combining polygons, a deep, cubic image is displayed.
Display Software Info
You can display software information when
downloading i-Îąppli.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settings
Disp. software infoDisplay or Not display
Starting i-Îąppli
i(for at least one second)
Select a software program to be started.
Software List
: GPS compatible i-Îąppli
: Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
: Management information i-Îąppli
: microSD memory card compatible i-Îąppli
: Vertical full display compatible i-Îąppli
: Horizontal display compatible i-Îąppli (incompatible
with full display)
: Horizontal full display compatible i-Îąppli
: i-Îąppli DX
: Mail-linked i-Îąppli
: Partially saved i-Îąppli
: Set for Auto Start
: Set for the i-Îąppli Stand-by display
: Set for both Auto Start and the i-Îąppli Stand-by
display
: Can set for the i-Îąppli Stand-by display
: Downloaded from an SSL page
: Downloaded or upgraded by using a different UIM
pYou can display the Software List on the microSD
memory card by mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli(microSD)
SW list(microSD).
pEach time you press c(
) from the Software
List in the FOMA phone, the display format changes.
pWhen you start an i-Îąppli DX program or while it is
running, the confirmation display might appear asking
whether to permit the i-Îąppli DX program to use the
FOMA phoneâs information and functions.
pWhen you select a partially saved i-Îąppli program, you
can download the remaining part of it.
pâ
â or â
â is displayed while i-Îąppli is running.
pTo end i-Îąppli, press and hold r for at least one
second or press h; then select âYESâ.
pThe software program you started last time comes at
the top of the list. You cannot manually change the
order of software programs.
pSee page 162 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
211
i-Îąppli
pDepending on the data volume on the IC card, you might
not be able to download Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
even if there is still available space for software storage.
Delete the displayed software programs following the
confirmation display, and then download it again. (Some
software programs might not be targeted for deletion,
depending on the software type to be downloaded.)
Depending on the software program, you need to start it and
delete the files on the IC card before deleting the software
program itself.
pYou can save up to 1 Mbyte per i-Îąppli program.
pâi-Îąppli mailâ is the mail sent and saved by mail-linked i-Îąppli
and mail received as mail-linked i-Îąppli. i-Îąppli mail is
automatically saved to the i-Îąppli mail folder.
< i-Îąppli Run>
Bring up IC Card List
You can list up Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli programs.
mOsaifu-KeitaiIC card content
pSee page 162 when you select
âSearch by i-modeâ.
IC Card List
Information
pWhen a software program to be started is not specified,
select a software program.
pTo start up i-Îąppli DX, set the data and time by âSet timeâ
beforehand.
pWhen a software program is running, melodies are played
back at the volume set for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ.
However, melodies are not played back during a call.
i-Îąppli
pYou may need to set the communication setting while a
software program is running.
pWhen communicating frequency is extremely high in a
certain period of time while i-Îąppli is running, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to continue communicating.
pWith some software programs, you can use the Web To
function and the Phone To/AV Phone To function from
i-Îąppli. However, you cannot use them while the software
program is running as the i-Îąppli Stand-by display.
pIf you start a camera from i-Îąppli, the shot images are not
saved with ordinary images, but are saved as part of i-Îąppli
for its usage.
pIf you start a camera from i-Îąppli, you can specify the image
size or image quality for some i-Îąppli programs.
pYou can scan QR codes and JAN codes from i-Îąppli using
the camera. The scanned data is saved and used by the
software program.
pImagesâť that are used by i-Îąppli and data you have
entered might be sent over the Internet to the server
automatically.
âťi-Îąppli uses the following types of images:
シ Images shot by the camera after it is started from a
camera-linked application program
シ Images obtained by the infrared data exchange function
of i-Îąppli
シ Images downloaded from sites or Internet web pages
シ Images obtained from Data Box by i-ιppli
pi-Îąppli mail running under mail-linked i-Îąppli might not be
displayed correctly.
pSome i-Îąppli programs save the various information used
on i-Îąppli when you finish it. However, the information might
not be saved if the low battery alarm sounds or the battery
pack is removed while i-Îąppli is running. If the battery level
indicates â â, either press -h or end i-Îąppli in
accordance with the operation of each software program.
212
Information
pYou can save the data files of some software programs to
the microSD memory card, but you might not be able to use
them for another model. You can check âiÎąppli(microSD)â
for the software programs that use the microSD memory
card.
pSome IPs (Information Providers) may access the software
program stored in your mobile phone and have it directly
halted, depending on the software program. In that case,
you will not be able to start or upgrade the software
program, or use it for the Stand-by display. You can delete it
or display the software information. To resume running the
software program, you need to receive the communication
to cancel the software halting state. Contact the IP
(Information Provider) to inquire about that.
pSome IPs (Information Providers) might send data to the
software program stored in your mobile phone depending
on the software program.
pWhen the IP (Information Provider) requests to halt or
re-open the software program or sends data to it, the mobile
phone communicates and â â is displayed. In this case,
you are not charged a communication fee.
pTo creators of i-Îąppli
If you encounter an error while creating a software program, the
Trace Information display might help identify the problem.
For how to check the Trace Information, see âTrace
Informationâ on page 212.
Trace Information
You can check the details when a software program
malfunctions.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli infoTrace info
pWhen the memory space for the Trace Info becomes
full, the information is overwritten from the oldest one.
pYou can operate âCopy infoâ and âDelete infoâ from the
Function menu.
Security Error History
You can check the details when an i-Îąppli program
ends because of a security error.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli info
Security error history
pYou can operate âCopy infoâ and âDelete infoâ from the
Function menu.
pYou can display the security error history also by
selecting â
â on the desktop.
Function Menu of the Software List/IC Card List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Set iÎąppli To You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli
program to start from links on sites or mail.
You can also set whether to start the i-Îąppli
program when you place the FOMA phone
over an IC card compatible scanning device.
You can set this for each software program.
Put a check mark for items to be set
l(
pSome items might not be set depending on
the software program.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Software setting You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli to
(Location
use location information. This function is
usage)
available only for i-Îąppli DX.
Location usageON or OFF
l(
Software setting You can set the software program for the
(Program guide Program Guide i-Îąppli that starts up from One
key)
Seg. You can set this for only the i-Îąppli DX
that links to One Seg.
Program guide keyON or OFF
l(
Auto start time See page 221.
Software info You can display the software name and
version of the i-Îąppli.
Software setting See page 221.
(Stand-by set)
Upgrade
Software setting You can set whether to communicate while
(Network set) i-Îąppli is running.
Network setON, OFF or Check every
startl(
pIf you select âCheck every startâ, the
confirmation display appears each time you
start it.
YES
Add desktop See page 114.
icon
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete
selected)
Delete selectedPut a check mark for
software programs to be deleted
l(
)YES
Software setting See page 222.
(Stand-by net)
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security
CodeYES
Software setting You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli to
(Icon info)
use information of icons for the i-mode mail,
SMS messages, Messages R/F, battery level,
Manner Mode and the service area/out-ofservice area.
Icon infoON or OFFl(
Move to
microSD
See page 298.
Software setting You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli to
(Change mld./ change the setting for ring tones or the
img.)
Stand-by display. This function is available
only for i-Îąppli DX.
Change mld./img.ON, OFF or Check
every changel(
pIf you select âCheck every changeâ, the
confirmation display appears each time you
change the setting for ring tones and the
Stand-by display from i-Îąppli.
Software setting You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli to
(See P. book/ refer to the Phonebook, Redial, and Received
hist.)
Calls. This function is available only for i-Îąppli
DX.
See P. book/hist.ON or OFF
l(
i-Îąppli
Delete
(Delete this)
Move to phone See page 298.
Power saver
When âÎąPower saverâ is set to âONâ, you can
set whether to validate Power Saver Mode for
each i-Îąppli program.
ON or OFF
Information
pWhen you set âSoftware setting (Icon info)â to âONâ for the
i-Îąppli Stand-by display, the icon information for unread
mail/message, battery level, Manner Mode, radio wave
strength and out-of-service area can be sent to the IP
(Information Provider) over the Internet in the same way as
the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM, and can be
deciphered by third parties.
pWhen the software program needs âSoftware setting (Icon
info)â, the software program might not run if âOFFâ is
selected.
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Software setting You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli to
(View ToruCa) refer to ToruCa files. This function is available
only for i-Îąppli DX.
View ToruCaON or OFFl(
213
i-Îąppli
Information
pDepending on the software program, you can upgrade it at
start.
pAt upgrading, the confirmation display might appear asking
whether to send the âserial number of your mobile phone/
UIMâ. Select âYESâ to start upgrading. In this case, the
âserial number of your mobile phone/UIMâ is sent to the IP
(Information Provider) over the Internet, so could be
deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP
(Information Provider) or others by this operation.
pYou cannot upgrade the mail-linked i-Îąppli in the following
cases:
シWhile details of the corresponding i-ιppli mail folder are
displayed
シWhile Mail Security is set
シWhen Mail Security is set for the corresponding i-ιppli mail
folder
â When you delete mail-linked i-Îąppli
The confirmation display appears asking whether to delete
the i-Îąppli mail folder as well. If you do not delete it, you can
check the text of mail from the Outbox/Inbox List.
YES. . . . . Deletes both the software program and the i-Îąppli
mail folder.
NO. . . . . . Deletes the software program only and the i-Îąppli
mail folder is left.
Cancel . . . Does not delete both the software program and
i-Îąppli mail folder; the former display returns.
pYou can delete neither the i-Îąppli program nor the i-Îąppli
mail folder even if you select âYESâ, in the following cases:
シ While displaying details of the folder
シ While Mail Security is set
シ While the folder is set with security
シ When the folder contains protected mail
â When you delete an i-Îąppli program whose files are
on the microSD memory card
The confirmation display appears asking whether to delete
files on the microSD memory card as well.
YES. . . . . Deletes both the software program and files on
the microSD memory card. Press âYESâ again on
the confirmation display. You need to enter your
Terminal Security Code to execute âDeleteâ or
âDelete selectedâ.
NO. . . . . . Deletes the software only and the files are left.
Cancel. . . Does not delete both the software program and
files on the microSD memory card, and the
former display returns.
â When you delete Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
The confirmation display appears telling that the files on the
IC card will be deleted.
pYou might not be able to delete the Osaifu-Keitai
compatible i-Îąppli unless you delete the files on the IC card
after starting the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli.
pYou might not be able to delete the Osaifu-Keitai
compatible i-Îąppli while the IC card function is working or
IC Card Lock is set.
Pre-installed i-Îąppli Programs
The following i-Îąppli programs are pre-installed:
pYou can delete the pre-installed i-Îąppli programs except for
âGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List RemoteController)â. You can re-download them from the
âP-SQUAREâ site (see page 163). When you use a UIM
other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions
(see page 39) are set to them.
pDeadlines for re-download services
ăťâăŞăă¸ăŹăźăľăźăşă˘ăă¤ăŤ (Ridge Racers Mobile)â: the
end of October, 2011
ăťâăˇăăˇăâźă&COLUMNS (PuyoPuyon & COLUMNS)â:
the end of October, 2011
ăťâčąčŞčžĺ
¸ (English Dictionary)â: the end of October, 2011
ăťâăŤăŚăłăăăŚăłăăŹă¤ăłGPS (Countdown Train GPS)â:
the end of November, 2010
ăťâăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł for P (Speech Translation for P)â: the end
of September, 2011
pThe re-download service might be halted or closed without
notice even in the service period.
pDeadlines for downloading i-Îąppli additional data
ăťâăŞăă¸ăŹăźăľăźăşă˘ăă¤ăŤ (Ridge Racers Mobile)â: the
end of October, 2011
ăťâčąčŞčžĺ
¸ (English Dictionary)â: the end of October, 2011
ăťâăŤăŚăłăăăŚăłăăŹă¤ăłGPS (Countdown Train GPS)â:
the end of December, 2010
ăťâăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł for P (Speech Translation for P)â: the end
of October, 2011
ăŞăă¸ăŹăźăľăźăşă˘ăă¤ăŤ (Ridge Racers Mobile)
That popular racing
game has now appeared
as a mobile phone game!
You can play the game
to the very limit in the full
horizontal display.
Š 2004-2007 NBGI
Software ListăŞăă¸ăŹăźăľăźăşă˘ăă¤ăŤ (Ridge Racers
Mobile)
When you activate this i-Îąppli program in Normal Style,
the confirmation display appears telling that you are
advised to play the game in Horizontal Open Style.
Read âăçĽăă (Information)â thoroughly
ăŻă (YES)
pIf you select âăăă (NO)â, âăçĽăă (Information)â
does not appear when you start the program next time.
214
3
Select a menu.
â What is the motion tracking?
It is a way of operating i-Îąppli programs (by inclining or
swinging the FOMA phone) through the recognition
technology of the inside camera.
pIt might not work in the following cases:
ăťWhen the lens of the inside camera is dirty
ăťWhen the clothes you are wearing are similar to the
background
ăťWhen the background is not stable such as when you are
moving
ăťWhen you are in a dark or too bright place
Information
pThis application program is the game played by inclining or
swinging the FOMA phone. If you excessively swing your
FOMA phone, it might happen that it hits against persons or
objects, resulting in accidents or damage. When playing the
game, securely take hold of your FOMA phone, do not
swing to an extent more than necessitated, and check
around you for safety.
ăˇăăˇăâźă&COLUMNS(PuyoPuyon & COLUMNS)
This is the transplanted version of âăˇăăˇăâźă
(PuyoPuyon)â and âăłăŠă ăš (COLUMNS)â, the puzzle games
that become a massive hit for game consoles.
They support the matches using the Bluetooth function and
widen the ways of playing.
Software Listăˇă&ăłăŠďźăˇăďź(PuyoPuyon)
or ăˇă&ăłăŠ ďźăłăŠďź(COLUMNS)Oo or 5
pSelect âăˇă&ăłăŠďźăˇăďź(PuyoPuyon)â for playing âăˇ
ăăˇăâźă (PuyoPuyon)â, or select âăˇă&ăłăŠďźăłăŠďź
(COLUMNS)â for playing COLUMNS.
pPress l to adjust the sound volume.
Select a game.
ăˇăăˇăâźă (PuyoPuyon)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .You can play âăˇăăˇăâźă (PuyoPuyon)â.
COLUMNS . . . You can play COLUMNS.
ăŞăăˇă§ăł (Option)
. . . . . . . . . . . . You can set the sound volume or vibrator
on/off of the application program. You can
also initialize data files.
çľäş (End) . . . You can end the application program.
pYou can play the opposite game of the one you have
selected in step 1 as well.
i-Îąppli
ARCADE . . . . . . . .For having auto racing among all 12
vehicles
DUEL . . . . . . . . . . .For having a racing match one
against one
SURVIVAL . . . . . . .For having auto racing among 4
vehicles. The vehicle ranked lowest
is disqualified by each round.
TIME ATTACK. . . .For driving only your own vehicle
around the course to attain the best
time
HELP . . . . . . . . . . .For displaying how to operate RIDGE
RACERS
OPTIONS . . . . . . . .For selecting a key operation type or
transmission, setting the volume
level or vibrator, and setting the
intuitive operation (motion tracking)
RECORD . . . . . . . .For displaying past records
DOWNLOAD . . . . .For adding courses and vehicles by
satisfying the certain conditions
INFORMATION . . .For connecting to the site which
contains the latest information and
walk-through guide.
EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . .You can end the application program.
pIf no keys are pressed for certain period of time from the
Menu display, the title display appears.
pIf no keys are pressed for certain period of time from the
title display, a demo display appears.
pThe additional data of the courses or vehicles are
stored in the microSD memory card.
â ăˇăăˇăâźă (PuyoPuyon)
Select a menu item.
Š SEGA
215
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
ă˛ă¨ăă§ăˇăăˇă (Hitori de PuyoPuyo)
. . . Play in the VS computer mode. When you have won
whole 10 rounds, you beat the game. Select âćĺă
ă (from the beginning)â. When a data file saved
halfway is found, you can select âçśăăă STAGEXX
(from STAGEXX)â.
âťXX denotes the stage number.
ăľăăă§ăˇăăˇă (Futari de PuyoPuyo)
. . . Play in the mode in which you can use the Bluetooth
communication to have a match against others. For a
Bluetooth match, see âAbout a Bluetooth matchâ on
page 216.
ă¨ăă¨ăăˇăăˇă (Tokoton PuyoPuyo)
. . . Play in the score attacking mode. First select the size
of âăˇă (Puyo)â and the level of difficulty. The
number of colors for âăˇă (Puyo)â differs depending
on the level of difficulty.
ăă¤ăšăłă˘ (High-score)
. . . Displays the high score of the âă¨ăă¨ăăˇăăˇă
(Tokoton PuyoPuyo)â mode.
BGMă¸ăăă (Change BGM)
. . . Change BGM.
ăăŤă (Help)
. . . Displays how to play âăˇăăˇăâźă (PuyoPuyon)â.
â COLUMNS
i-Îąppli
Select a menu item.
Š SEGA
VS CPU . . . Play in the VS computer mode. When you
have won whole 10 rounds, you beat the
game. Select âćĺăă (from the
beginning)â. When a data file saved halfway
is found, you can select âçśăăă
STAGEXX (from STAGEXX)â.
âťXX denotes the stage number.
VS HUMAN
. . . . . . . . . . Play in the mode in which you can use
Bluetooth communication to have a match
against others. For a Bluetooth match, see
âAbout a Bluetooth matchâ on page 216.
ă¨ăłăăŹăš (Endless)
. . . . . . . . . . Play in the score attacking mode.
First select the level of difficulty. The starting
level, score, and color of jewels vary
depending on the level of difficulty.
ăă¤ăšăłă˘ (High-score)
. . . . . . . . . . Displays the high score of the âă¨ăłăăŹăš
(Endless)â mode.
BGMĺ¤ć´ (Change BGM)
. . . . . . . . . . Change BGM.
ăăŤă (Help)
. . . . . . . . . . Displays how to play COLUMNS.
â About a Bluetooth match
When you select âăľăăă§ăˇăăˇă (Futari de PuyoPuyo)â
on the âăˇăăˇăâźă (PuyoPuyon)â menu, or when you
select âVS HUMANâ on the COLUMNS menu, you need to
do the following to connect to your opponent using
Bluetooth:
To have a match with an unregistered player (first time)
Operation at your side
Operation at your opponent
(1P side)
(2P side)
Select âćŞçťé˛ăŽç¸ćă¨ĺŻž
He/She selects âćŞçťé˛ăŽç¸
ćŚ (1Pĺ´) [Match with an
ćă¨ĺŻžćŚ (2Pĺ´) [Match with
unregistered player
an unregistered player (2P
(1P side)]â and select
side)]â and enter his/her
âYESâ.
Terminal Security Code.
Select the opponentâs
FOMA phone you have
found, select âYESâ, and
enter your Terminal
Security Code.
When he/she is
requested to connect, he/
she selects âYESâ.
Enter the same Bluetooth
passkey as that of the
opponent and select â確ĺŽ
(OK)â.
He/She enters any
Bluetooth passkey and
select âç˘şĺŽ (OK)â.
Check that the 2P side is
waiting for request and
select âćşĺĺŽäş (Ready)â.
When he/she receives
your request, he/she
selects âăŻă (YES)â.
To have a match with a registered player
Operation at your side
Operation at your opponent
(1P side)
(2P side)
Select âçťé˛ć¸ăŽç¸ćă¨ĺŻž
He/She selects âçťé˛ć¸ăŽ
ćŚ (1Pĺ´) [Match with a
ç¸ćă¨ĺŻžćŚ (2Pĺ´) [Match
registered player
with a registered player
(1P side)]â.
(2P side)]â.
Select the opponentâs
FOMA phone.
He/She selects your
FOMA phone.
Check that the 2P side is
waiting for request and
select âćşĺĺŽäş (Ready)â.
When he/she receives
your request, he/she
selects âăŻă (YES)â.
Information
pWhen âçťé˛ć¸ăŽç¸ćă¨ĺŻžćŚ (1Pĺ´) [Match with a registered
player (1P side)]â or âçťé˛ć¸ăŽç¸ćă¨ĺŻžćŚ (2Pĺ´) [Match
with a registered player (2P side)]â is selected with no
Bluetooth device registered, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to search for another player.
When âYESâ is selected, see âTo have a match with an
unregistered player (first time)â.
pWhen you select a Bluetooth device other than a FOMA
phone, the connection results in an error.
pSee page 348 for Bluetooth.
216
čąčŞčžĺ
¸ (English Dictionary)
You can use three volumes of
dictionaries, âčąäźčŠąă¨ăŁăăŽă˛ă¨ăă¨
čžĺ
¸ (Spur-of-the-moment English
conversation dictionary)â, âčąĺčžĺ
¸
(English-Japanese dictionary)â, and âĺ
čąčžĺ
¸ (Japanese-English dictionary)â.
Voice data of the Spur-of-the-moment
English conversation dictionary, and
dictionary data of the English-Japanese
dictionary and Japanese-English dictionary are saved to a
microSD memory card.
pYou are charged a packet communication fee to download voice
data of Spur-of-the-moment English conversation dictionary or
dictionary data of Japanese-English dictionary or
English-Japanese dictionary. As the size of voice data or dictionary
data is bulky, you are advised to subscribe to Pake-Houdai.
pWhile accessing the microSD memory card, wait until the
operation ends without operating the keys.
If the number of files stored on the microSD memory card
increases, it may take long to access it.
Software ListčąčŞčžĺ
¸ (English dictionary)
Read âăĺŠç¨ăŽĺ㍠(Before use)â thoroughly
OK
ăŤăŚăłăăăŚăłăăŹă¤ăłGPS (Countdown Train GPS)
You can download the time schedule of
trains, and can count down the
departure time of the train you want to
catch on a minute/second basis. The
alarm function is also provided to notify
you of 5 to 30 minutes before the
departure. You can update the time
schedule from the menu so the latest
one is always available. Further, you
Powered by
can search for the nearest station
JR Travel Navigator
using the GPS function.
pFor details, refer to âăăŤă (Help)â in the menu.
Select a station nameSelect a line and
destinationHighlight a train and press
i(
)ăŻă (YES)
ăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł for P (Speech Translation for P)
Just by speaking a phrase to be
translated into your FOMA phone, this
application program translates it from
Japanese to English and vice versa.
Š FueTrek Co.,Ltd. 2007
pYou may be separately charged a packet communication fee
for using.
Software ListăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł_P (Speech
Translation_P)
Read âăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨łă¨ăŻ (What is Speech
Translation?)â and âăĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â
thoroughlyĺćăă (Agree)
pYou need to agree with âăĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â for
the first time.
217
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
čąäźčŠąă¨ăŁăăŽă˛ă¨ăă¨čžĺ
¸
(Spur-of-the-moment English conversation dictionary)
. . . The Spur-of-the-moment English conversation dictionary
starts. Check the English expressions by specifying a
scene or keyword you encounter or use in your daily life.
Further, you can confirm those English expressions with
audio, or enjoy the conversation in a quiz style.
ćşć礞çŁäżŽčąĺčžĺ
¸
(English-Japanese dictionary supervised by Obunsya)
. . . The English-Japanese dictionary starts. Enter the
English spelling you want to check into the input box.
When the English-Japanese dictionary is not
downloaded, the confirmation display appears telling
that it will be downloaded. Select âOKâ to download.
ćşć礞çŁäżŽĺčąčžĺ
¸
(Japanese-English dictionary supervised by Obunsya)
. . . The Japanese-English dictionary starts. Enter the
Japanese readings you want to check into the input
box. When the Japanese-English dictionary is not
downloaded, the confirmation display appears telling
that it will be downloaded. Select âOKâ to download.
ćĺăľă¤ăşĺ¤ć´ (Change character size)
. . . Changes the character size. Select a character size
and press Oo.
pYou can bookmark the results you looked up in each
) and select âăć°ăŤĺ
Ľă
dictionary. Press l(
çťé˛ (Bookmark)â to store.
l(
)ćĺŻé§
ć¤ç´˘ (GPS) [Search the
nearest station (GPS)] or é§
ĺĺ
Ľĺć¤ç´˘
(Search by entering station name)
i-Îąppli
Select a dictionary to be used.
Read âĺ
貏äşé
(Exemption clause)â
thoroughlyi(
)ăŻă (YES)
ćĺŻé§
ć¤ç´˘ (GPS) [Search the nearest station (GPS)]
. . . .Measures your current location and searches the
surroundings for a station.
é§
ĺĺ
Ľĺć¤ç´˘ (Search by entering station name)
. . . .Enter a station name, and press i(
). You
do not need to enter the whole station name.
pTo set the size of characters on the display, select
â大 (Large)â, âä¸ (Medium)â, or âĺ° (Small)â.
pIf you put a check mark for â揥ĺăăăăŽçťé˘ă襨示ă
ăŞăă(Does not show this display from the next time.)â,
âăĺŠç¨ăŽĺ㍠(Before use)â does not appear when you
start the program next time.
Software ListăŤăŚăłăăăŚăłăăŹă¤ăł-P
(Countdown Train-P)
3
Read âăĺŠç¨ćł¨ćäşé
(Cautions in use)â
thoroughlyOKăŻă (YES)
pIf you select âăăă (NO)â, âăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨łă¨ăŻ (What
is Speech Translation?)â, âăĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â,
and âăĺŠç¨ćł¨ćäşé
(Cautions in use)â do not appear
when you start the program next time.
ăŻă (YES)OK
Select a menu item.
pâď˝ă˘ăăŞăŽä˝żăćš (How to use i-Îąppli)â appears at the
first startup.
Translation . . . . Starts translation.
Profile editing . . Edit your name, gender, and age.
History . . . . . . . . Displays translation history.
Menu . . . . . . . . . Confirm/Change the settings.
pPress i to switch between Japanese and English.
i-Îąppli
ĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)
By using the GPS function and map, you can check the map
for where you are currently in or for the place you specify, or
check your nearby area for details. You can then navigate
yourself to the destination by vehicle, on foot, or by car.
Further, you can easily get train information by voice input.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
You are advised to use Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full for
using this application program.
pIf you delete this application program and then when you
want to resume it, download it from âď˝ă¨ăŞă˘ăźĺ¨čžşć
ĺ ąăź
(i-area -Local Information-)â.
pThis application program is a mail-linked i-Îąppli program, so
it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode.
pNote that we are not held responsible for the accuracy and
promptness of the map and route information.
pWhile driving, ensure that a person other than the driver
operates this application program.
pSee page 233 for details on operations.
漽ăŞăŻĺşĺă˘ăăŞ2
(Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)
â漽ăŞăŻĺşĺă˘ăăŞ2 (Rakuoku
Exhibition Application 2)â enables you
to easily exhibit your goods on
Rakuoku whenever you want wherever
you are. Even if you are a beginner, an
instruction guides you through
exhibition procedures, so you can use it
easily. The convenient functions such
as shooting/editing photos and saving âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
records are available so that you can
exhibit your goods in a shorter time than you do on sites.
pYou need to agree with âĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â for the first
time.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
pFor details on Rakuoku, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide
[i-mode]â.
pTo exhibit on Rakuoku, you need to register with the Rakuten
membership and exhibitor membership.
pFor the information about Rakuoku, refer to
i-mode site.
i-mode site iMenuâ漽ăŞăŻ
ăˇă§ăł- (Rakuoku
-ăŞăźăŻ
-Auction-)
QR code for
accessing the site
ď˝ă˘ăăŞăăłăăłă° (i-Îąppli Banking)
This is an i-Îąppli program that enables
you to conveniently use mobile
banking. Mobile banking enables you to
use your FOMA phone to check the
account balance, check the deposits/
withdrawals, and transfer/shift money
whenever you want and wherever you
are. By entering your specified
password at the start of this application âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
program, you can use the mobile
banking services for up to two banks.
pTo use mobile banking, you need to have the bank account
and subscribe to the mobile banking service of each bank.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
pFor details on the i-Îąppli Banking, refer to âMobile Phone
Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
pFor the information about i-Îąppli Banking,
refer to i-mode site.
i-mode site iMenuâăĄăăĽăźďźć¤ç´˘ (Menu/
Search)âă˘ăă¤ăŤăăłăăłă°
(Mobile Banking)âď˝ă˘ăăŞă
QR code for
accessing the site
ăłăăłă° (i-Îąppli Banking)
218
GăŤăă¤ăăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł
(G Guide Program List Remote-controller)
â About program booking function
You can select and book a program you want to watch from
the program list of this application program.
How to book a program
1. Software ListGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program
List Remote-Controller)Highlight a program to be booked
and press i(
)čŚč´äşç´ (Book program)
äşç´ĺŽčĄ (Execute booking)Follow the instructions on
the display.
â About timer recording function
You can select a program you want to record and set a timer
recording from the program list of this application program.
How to set a timer recording
1. Software ListGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program
List Remote-Controller)Highlight a program to be set for
)âŻăŻăłăťă°é˛
a timer recording and press i(
çťäşç´ (One Seg timer recording)äşç´ĺŽčĄ (Execute
booking)Follow the instructions on the display.
(You can set a timer recording also by highlighting a
program and pressing s.)
iDč¨ĺŽă˘ă㪠(iD Setting Application)
Chargeless electronic money âiDâ is a
service that enables you to do shopping
by placing your Osaifu-Keitai or a credit
card with âiDâ mounted over a scanning
device. You can do shopping very
easily without signing. Depending on
the card publishing company, cashing
is also supported.
pFor using âiDâ, you need to subscribe âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
to a card publishing company that
supports âiDâ, as well as an Osaifu-Keitai on which the
specified settings have been completed by the iD application
program on the card application program provided by the
card publishing company or a credit card that mounts âiDâ.
pWhen you use âiDâ on Osaifu-Keitai, start the iD application
program, agree with âăĺŠç¨ä¸ăŽćł¨ć (Caution in Use)â, and
then complete the specified settings at the iD application
program end. Then download or start the card application
program, and perform the specified settings at the card
application program end.
pThe expense (annual fees, etc.) charged for the service that
supports âiDâ varies depending on the card publishing
company.
pYou are charged a packet communication fee for
downloading the iD application program, and the card
application program.
pFor the information about âiDâ, refer to the
i-mode site of âiDâ.
i-mode site iMenuâăĄăăĽăźďźć¤ç´˘ (Menu/
Search)âăiDă
QR code for
accessing the site
219
i-Îąppli
This is a convenient application program
that bundles the TV program list and AV
remote-controller function and the
monthly charge is free.
Anytime and anywhere you are, you can
easily obtain the terrestrial digital,
terrestrial analog or BS digital TV program
information for the desired time zone. You
can know about titles, contents, and start/ âťThe display is for reference.
end times of TV programs. Further, you
The actual one differs.
can start a One Seg program from the
Local programs according
program list and vice versa.
to your region appear on
your display.
If there is any program you want to
watch, you can book timer recordings of the program on a
DVD hard disk recorder over the Internet. (You need to have a
DVD hard disk recorder that supports the remote timer
recording function. And you need to perform initial settings of
this application program.) Further, you can search for the
program information by keywords such as program genres or
celebrities you like. You can also remote-control a TV, video
recorder, and DVD player. (Some models are not supported.)
pSee âUsing Infrared Remote-controller Functionâ on
page 306 for details of the infrared remote-controller.
pYou need to make the initial settings and to agree with the
usage rules for the first time.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
pTo use this application program overseas, set the date/time
for the FOMA phone to Japan time.
pFor details, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
pYou cannot delete GăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide
Program List Remote-controller).
pGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List Remotecontroller) is a mail-linked i-Îąppli program, so you cannot use
it in B Mode of 2in1.
â About remote timer recording function
If you have a DVD hard disk recorder that supports the
remote timer recording function, you can set timer
recordings from the program list of this application program
over the Internet even if you are away.
For remote timer recording, you need to make initial settings
of this application program.
How to make initial settings
1. Set the Internet connection for the DVD hard disk
recorder (Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD hard disk
recorder you use.)
2. Software ListGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide
Program List Remote-Controller)i(
ăŞă˘ăźăé˛çťäşç´ (Remote timer recording)
Operate following the guidance.
How to set timer recordings
After the initial settings, specify your desired program and
select âăŞă˘ăźăé˛çťäşç´ (Remote timer recording)â. Then,
the DVD hard disk recorder specified on this application
program is connected via the Internet, and you can set timer
recordings.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
DCMXăŻăŹă¸ăăă˘ă㪠(DCMX Credit Application)
âDCMXâ is a credit service that supports
âiDâ and offered by NTT DoCoMo
Group. DCMX provides DCMX mini that
enables you to use up to ÂĽ10,000 per
month and respective DCMX services
that enable you to use more amount
and save up DoCoMo points.
With âDCMX miniâ, you can easily make
a subscription from this application
âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
program and immediately use Mobile
Phone Credit.
Subscribing for membership/Screening âť1
Setting card information
i-Îąppli
Use
No troublesome deposit is
required!
Just by placing the setup
completed mobile phone over
the scanning device at a
shop, you can enjoy
shopping without signingâť3.
Check âť2
You can check, on the
application program, the
balance for the current
month and detailed account!
Change
When updating your card or
changing models, you can
apply from the application
program.
âť1 The online screening is conducted at your subscription for
DCMX mini. For subscribing to a service other than âDCMX
miniâ, you are connected to the subscription page for imode.
âť2 The checking function for usage status and others is
available for âDCMX miniâ only.
âť3 You might be required to enter your pin number under
certain conditions.
pFor service contents and details of
subscriptions, refer to the i-mode site of
DCMX.
ăťi-mode site: iMenuâDCMX iD
QR code for
accessing the site
Information
pTo start this application program for the first time, you need
to agree with âăĺŠç¨ä¸ăŽćł¨ć (Cautions in use)â.
pYou are charged a packet communication fee for settings
and operations.
â Cautions on Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
Note that we take no responsibility for any information set on
your IC card.
220
FOMA é俥ç°ĺ˘ç˘şčŞă˘ăăŞ
(FOMA Communication Environment Check Îąppli)
âFOMA é俥ç°ĺ˘ç˘şčŞă˘ă㪠(FOMA
Communication Environment Check
Îąppli)â enables you to check whether
the FOMA phone is available at the
FOMA High-Speed Area.
pUse FOMA Communication
Environment Check Îąppli with your
consent to âăĺŠç¨ăŽćł¨ć (Cautions in
use)â.
âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
pDepending on the communication
environment (such as weather, radio
wave conditions, network conditions state) at communication
environment check, the different result or âout of serviceâ might
appear even in the same area or at the same period of time.
pYou might not be able to check correctly if you use another
function while using this application program.
< iÎąppli Settings>
Setting i-Îąppli
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settings
Do the following operations.
Item
Operation/Explanation
Auto start setting See page 221.
Disp. software See page 211.
info
Preferred tone You can set which sound to be output
preferentially, from MUSIC or i-Îąppli program,
for when you start an i-Îąppli program during
music playback.
MUSIC or iÎąppli
ÎąBacklight
You can set the backlight operation for when
an i-Îąppli program is running.
Select an item.
Depend on system
. . . Follows the setting of âBacklightâ.
Depend on software
. . . Follows the setting of each software program.
Constant light
. . . Lights constantly.
ÎąPower saver You can set to Power Saver Mode to
decrease battery consumption by suspending
the i-Îąppli program temporarily for when you
close the FOMA phone during i-Îąppli running.
ON or OFF
pThis setting is valid from when an i-Îąppli
program starts until it closes.
pEven when this function is set to âONâ,
Power Saver Mode becomes invalid if
âPower saverâ that can be set for each
i-Îąppli program is set to âOFFâ.
Item
ÎąVibrator
Operation/Explanation
Auto Start Info
You can set the vibrator operation for when
an i-Îąppli program is running.
Depend on system or Depend on software
Depend on system
. . . Does not work regardless of the setting of
âVibratorâ. With some software programs,
the vibrator works.
Depend on software
. . . Follows the setting of each software
program.
You can check whether a software program has started
automatically and properly. Also, you can check the
information of start failure from IC card. Up to three
records of automatic start, a record of automatic start
set by i-Îąppli, and a record of start failure from IC card
are stored.
Check settings You can check each of âiÎąppli settingsâ.
Information
<ÎąBacklight> <ÎąVibrator>
pWith some software programs, the backlight and vibrator
settings are âOFFâ. Consequently, if you set âDepend on
softwareâ, the backlight and vibrator will not work; if you
want them to work, set âDepend on systemâ.
Starting i-Îąppli Automatically
Auto Start Setting
You can set whether to enable automatic start of i-Îąppli
programs.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settings
Auto start settingON or OFF
Auto Start Time
You can set the date and time for automatic start. You
can set for up to three software programs.
Software List/IC Card Listi(
Auto start time
Put a check mark for an item to be set
l(
Time interval set
. . . . . . Starts at an interval specified by the software
program. The setting is completed.
Start time set
. . . . . . Starts at the set start time automatically.
Select start time
Enter the date and time to be set.
Press l(
StartO . . . Started automatically and properly.
StartX. . . . Did not start automatically. When â
displayed, you can press Oo(
â is
) to
start the software program.
Startâ . . . . Has not started yet.
Information
pSoftware programs do not start automatically in the
following cases:
ăťWhen the FOMA phone is turned off
ăťWhen the date and time are not set
ăťWhen another function is working
ăťDuring Lock All
ăťDuring Personal Data Lock
ăťWhile animation/Flash movie is being played back
ăťWhen the time set for automatic start is identical to the
reserved time set for âSoftware updateâ, or the time set for
an alarm of âAlarmâ, âScheduleâ or âToDoâ, âBook programâ
or âTimer recordingâ
ăťWhen a start time has been specified to the same software
program within 10 minutes from the previous auto-start
pIf automatic start fails, â
â appears on the desktop.
Select the icon to bring up the Auto Start Info.
i-Îąppli
You can make an i-Îąppli program start automatically at
the set date and time. Set the date and time for
automatic start using Auto Start Time.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli infoAuto start info
< i-Îąppli Stand-by Display>
Operating i-Îąppli Stand-by Display
Software Setting (Stand-by Set)
You can set an i-Îąppli program for the Stand-by
display. Once set, the i-Îąppli Stand-by display
automatically appears each time you bring up the
Stand-by display.
Software List/IC Card Listi(
Software settingStand-by set
ON or OFFl(
â
â is displayed for the software program set as the
Stand-by display. â
â or â
â is displayed while an
i-Îąppli Stand-by display is running.
1 timeSelect a type of repeat.
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
pIf you select â1 timeâ, the automatic start is not repeated.
pIf you select âWeeklyâ, put a check mark for days of the
week to be set and press l(
).
).
221
â To operate an i-Îąppli program as a normal i-Îąppli
program when an i-Îąppli Stand-by display is running
From the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, press r.
â
â or â
â changes to a blinking â
â or â
â and then
you can operate the i-Îąppli program as a normal one.
pTo return to the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, press and hold
r for at least one second or press h; then select
âEndedâ. To release the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, select
âTerminatedâ, and select âYESâ.
Information
pIf you turn off the FOMA phone while the i-Îąppli Stand-by
display is running, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to start the i-Îąppli program when you turn on the
power again.
pYou can set only one software program for the i-Îąppli
Stand-by display.
i-Îąppli
pSome i-Îąppli programs cannot be set for the Stand-by display.
pWith some software programs set as the i-Îąppli Stand-by
display, you can press a key to go from the normal i-Îąppli
status to the i-Îąppli Stand-by display status. However, you
cannot return to the i-Îąppli Stand-by display if another menu
function is running.
pNote that you might not be able to receive timely information
if you have set âSoftware setting (Stand-by net)â to âOFFâ.
pYou cannot use the Web To function and the Phone To/AV
Phone To function from the i-Îąppli Stand-by display.
pIf the software program which connects to the network is set
for the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, it might not operate
successfully because of radio wave conditions or other
factors.
pWhen you bring up the Stand-by display while a menu
function is operating, the image set for âStand-by displayâ of
âDisplay settingâ will be displayed, even when the i-Îąppli
Stand-by display is set.
pWhen communicating frequency is extremely high in a
certain period of time while an i-Îąppli program is running as
the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, the confirmation display
appears. When you press -r, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to continue communication.
pIf you set Lock All or Personal Data Lock when the i-Îąppli
Stand-by display is shown, the i-Îąppli Stand-by display will
end. If you set Lock All, the image set for âStand-by displayâ
of âDisplay settingâ will be displayed and if you set Personal
Data Lock, the default Stand-by display will be displayed.
The i-Îąppli Stand-by display will return when you release
each lock.
Software Setting (Stand-by Net)
You can set whether to permit communication for when
the i-Îąppli Stand-by display is running.
Software List/IC Card Listi(
Software settingStand-by net
ON or OFFl(
222
End Stand-by Display
You can temporarily end the running i-Îąppli Stand-by
display. Also, you can release the i-Îąppli Stand-by
display.
mSettingsDisplayDisplay setting
Stand-by displayEnd iÎąppli display
End or Terminate
pWhen you select âTerminateâ, select âYESâ.
End Stand-by Info
When the i-Îąppli Stand-by display does not end
successfully, you can check the date/time and its
reason.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli info
End stand-by info
pWhen â
â is displayed on the End Stand-by Info
), and select âCopy infoâ to
display, press i(
copy the information. Select âDelete infoâ, and select
âYESâ to delete the information.
< iÎąppli(microSD)>
Displaying i-Îąppli Data Files on
the microSD Memory Card
Depending on the i-Îąppli program, you can save its
data files on the microSD memory card.
You can display the i-Îąppli data files saved on the
microSD memory card.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli(microSD)
iÎąppli(microSD)
Function Menu while i-Îąppli Data File is Displayed
Function menu
Folder info
Operation/Explanation
You can display the information of the
software program that uses the selected
folder, available/unavailable for folder usage,
and the reason if unavailable.
Delete folder You can delete the selected folder and files in
the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
What is Osaifu-Keitai? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
What is iC Transfer Service? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
What is ToruCa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšToruCaâş
225
Obtaining ToruCa Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšObtain ToruCa Filesâş
226
Displaying ToruCa Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšToruCa Viewerâş
226
How to See ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
Setting about ToruCa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšToruCa Settingsâş
230
Locking IC Card Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšIC Card Lockâş
230
223
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
What is Osaifu-Keitai?
The convenient i-mode function which uses the IC card
function of the i-mode phone (i-mode FeliCa), or the
i-mode phone with the IC card mounted is called
âOsaifu-Keitaiâ.
FeliCa is one of the non-contact IC technologies that
enables you to read and write data just by placing it
over a scanning device.
Just by placing Osaifu-Keitai over the scanning device
in a shop, you can pay by electronic cash or use it as a
air ticket or reward card. Mobile phones have become
one of easy-to-use tools.
Further, different from the existing FeliCa compatible
non-contact IC card, the new one enables you to
deposit electronic money by using the communication
into the IC card inside the Osaifu-Keitai or to check
your account for balance or usage details.
âťTo use Osaifu-Keitai compatible service, you need to make
the settings from i-Îąppli (IC application) program which
supports the IC card function [for details, inquire to IP
(Information Provider)].
âťFor cautions on using each Osaifu-Keitai compatible
service, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
pData on the IC card might be lost or deformed owing to the
malfunction of Osaifu-Keitai. (When we keep your
Osaifu-Keitai for repair, we cannot keep it with data files left,
so the data files shall be deleted beforehand by yourself as a
rule.) Use the backup service of the IP (Information Provider)
for supports such as reissue, restoration, temporary storage
or transfer of data files, except for the data transfer by iC
transfer service. The availability of backup services and their
usage conditions (necessary applications, charges, etc.) and
the support availability of iC transfer service differ depending
on the service. Contact the IP (Information Provider)
beforehand. For your important data files, be sure to use the
service with backup support.
pIn any case including malfunction or model change, we
cannot be held responsible for the loss or deformation of
data on the IC card or other losses caused regarding
Osaifu-Keitai compatible services.
pIf your Osaifu-Keitai has been stolen or lost, inquire of the
provider for Osaifu-Keitai compatible service you use about
ways of dealing with the trouble, immediately. With this
FOMA phone, you can use Omakase Lock or IC Card Lock.
(See page 120, and page 230)
224
What is iC Transfer Service?
iC transfer serviceâť1 is the service for transferring the
data files on the IC card at a timeâť2 to your new
Osaifu-Keitai mobile phoneâť3 when you replace your
Osaifu-Keitai mobile phone such as at the time of
model change or malfunction. After completing the
transfer of data files on the IC card, just download
Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli program, and then you
can easily use the Osaifu-Keitai services.
iC transfer service is available at the service counters
such as a DoCoMo shop nearby.
For details, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide
[i-mode]â.
âť1 You are charged a handling fee for using iC transfer
service. (You might not be charged at times.)
In addition, you are charged a packet communication
fee for downloading iC application programs and
respective settings.
âť2 Some Osaifu-Keitai services are not supported. The
services that are not supported are deleted when you
use iC transfer service, so ensure that you use a backup service for the Osaifu-Keitai services or delete them
in advance.
âť3 iC transfer service is available when new Osaifu-Keitai
mobile phone is iC transfer service compatible model.
Starting Osaifu-Keitai
Compatible i-Îąppli
Read and Write Data inside the IC Card
You can start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli from
the Software List or IC Card List. By using Osaifu-Keitai
compatible i-Îąppli, you can read/write the data inside
the IC card and use convenient functions such as
depositing electronic money or traffic tickets, or
checking your account for the balance and usage
details on the mobile phone.
pTake care of your Terminal Security Code and password
used for each service not to reveal to anyone.
pWhen you start or download the Osaifu-Keitai compatible
i-Îąppli program for the first time, the message âUse IC card
for current UIM?â appears. When you select âYESâ, you
cannot use the IC card function afterward unless you insert
the same UIM.
To use the IC card function with another UIM, insert the
currently supported UIM first and then deleted all the OsaifuKeitai compatible i-Îąppli programs. Otherwise, you cannot
use it.
pReading and writing data from the software program and to
the IC card is suspended in the following cases:
In that case, the read or written data is discarded. The
operation after the communication ends differs depending on
the service you use.
ăťWhen a call comes in while i-Îąppli is running
ăťWhen the battery goes flat
1
i(for at least one second)Select an
Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli program.
The Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli program starts up.
Use Osaifu-Keitai
Place the FeliCa mark â
â of the FOMA phone over
the scanning device, and you can use the FOMA phone
as electronic money to pay for shopping or to use it as
a traffic ticket. This function is available without
starting the software program.
pDuring a call or i-mode connection, you can use OsaifuKeitai by placing the FeliCa mark over the scanning device,
however, you cannot start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible
i-Îąppli.
< ToruCa>
What is ToruCa?
ToruCa is an electronic card that you can obtain with
Osaifu-Keitai for use as fliers, restaurant cards, and
coupon tickets.
You can obtain ToruCa files from scanning devices or
sites and can easily exchange them using mail, infrared
ray, or a microSD memory card.
The obtained ToruCa files are saved to âToruCaâ of
âOsaifu-Keitaiâ.
pAvailable on the ToruCa compatible model. For details, refer
to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
â Flow for using ToruCa
Place the FeliCa mark â
â of the FOMA
phone over the scanning device to use the
target service.
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights when you bring your
FOMA phone close to a scanning device and
communication becomes ready.
Place your Osaifu-Keitai over a scanning
device to obtain a ToruCa file.
Information
pMount the battery pack to use Osaifu-Keitai. Even when the
power is turned off or when the battery has gone flat, you
can use Osaifu-Keitai by placing the FeliCa mark over the
scanning device, however, you cannot start the OsaifuKeitai compatible i-Îąppli. You might not be able to use
Osaifu-Keitai if you have left the battery unused for a long
period or not charged it after the low battery alarm sounds.
Charge the battery.
pWhen the FeliCa mark â â of the FOMA phone placed
over the scanning device is not identified, slightly move the
mark forwards, backwards, to left, or to right.
pOsaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli might start when you place
the FOMA phone over the scanning device.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Place the FeliCa mark
â
â of the FOMA phone
over the scanning device.
You can view more detailed information
by using â芳細 (Details)â key.
â Sources of ToruCa files
Scanning device
Site
i-Îąppli
QR code
External memory
Mail,
infrared data exchange,
iC communication
Exchanges ToruCa
files between i-mode
phones.
225
< Obtain ToruCa Files>
Obtaining ToruCa Files
Obtain from Scanning Device
You can obtain the ToruCa file from a scanning device
using the IC card function. By obtaining detailed
information, a ToruCa file becomes a ToruCa file
(details) which has more pieces of information.
pFor a ToruCa file (details), you can download up to 100
Kbytes per file, and for a ToruCa file before obtaining the
details, you can download up to 1 Kbyte per file.
Place the FeliCa mark â
â of the FOMA
phone over the scanning device.
Information
pWhen you fail to obtain the ToruCa file, a ToruCa
failed-to-obtain tone sounds, Call/Charging indicator lights.
pA ToruCa obtained tone and a ToruCa failed-to-obtain tone
sound at the volume set for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ.
pDepending on the settings by IPs (Information Providers),
you might not be able to update ToruCa files or send them
by mail or infrared data exchange.
< ToruCa Viewer>
Displaying ToruCa Files
You can display the ToruCa file obtained using the IC
card function, or from sites or mail.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
â When the ToruCa file is obtained
A ToruCa obtained tone sounds, the
Call/Charging indicator flickers.
pWhen âReceiving displayâ is set to
âONâ, detailed display of obtained
ToruCa file appears.
pFor a ToruCa file before obtaining
detailed information, the
confirmation display appears asking
whether to connect to a site to download detailed
information. Select âYESâ to display a ToruCa file (details)
with detailed information obtained. Select âNOâ to display a
ToruCa file without detailed information.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds or âReceiving
displayâ is set to âOFFâ, â
â appears on the desktop.
Press Oo, highlight
, and press Oo(
); then
the ToruCa File List appears.
â About Auto-reading Function of ToruCa
If you set âAuto readingâ to âAcceptâ to use the ToruCa files
by placing the FOMA phone over the scanning device, the
available ToruCa files are automatically recognized. The
used ToruCa files are converted into âUsedâ and then moved
to the âUsed ToruCaâ folder. Up to 20 used ToruCa files are
saved, and when the number of the files exceeds 20, the
files are deleted from the one downloaded at the oldest date.
pEven if âAuto readingâ is set to âRejectâ, the confirmation
display might appear asking whether to use âAuto readingâ
when you place the FOMA phone over the scanning
device. To use ToruCa files, select âYESâ, and then set
âAuto readingâ to âAcceptâ.
226
mOsaifu-KeitaiToruCa
Select a folder.
pEach time you press m from
the ToruCa Folder List, you can
switch folders between the
ToruCa Folder List
FOMA phone and the microSD
memory card.
pWhen the folder contains unread ToruCa files, â
â
appears.
Select a ToruCa file.
ToruCa File List
Detailed ToruCa File display
â When obtaining detailed information from a ToruCa file
A ToruCa file before obtaining detailed information itself
does not show the detailed information. Select â芳細
(Details)â on the ToruCa file display and select âYESâ to
connect to the site to obtain more detailed information.
After obtaining the detailed information, the ToruCa file is
overwritten and saved.
Information
pYou are charged the ordinary packet fee for obtaining.
Function Menu of the ToruCa Folder List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Operate folder You can create a user folder. You can create
(Add folder) up to 20 folders.
Add folderEnter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters for the FOMA phone.
pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch
characters for the microSD memory card.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Operate folder You can edit the folder name for the user
(Edit folder
folder.
Edit folder nameEnter a folder name.
name)
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters for the FOMA phone.
pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63
half-pitch characters for the microSD
memory card.
Operate folder All ToruCa files in the folder are deleted.
(Delete folder) Delete folderEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES
Search all
folders
Copy
(Copy to
microSD)
You can copy the ToruCa files together with
the folder from the FOMA phone to the
microSD memory card.
Copy to microSD
Copy
(CPY all to
microSD)
You can copy all the ToruCa files together
with the folder from the FOMA phone to the
microSD memory card.
CPY all to microSDEnter your
Terminal Security CodeYES
Copy
(Copy to
phone)
You can copy the ToruCa files together with
the folder from the microSD memory card to
the FOMA phone.
Copy to phone
Copy
(Copy all to
phone)
You can copy all the ToruCa files together
with the folder from the microSD memory card
to the FOMA phone.
Copy all to phoneAdd or Overwrite
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Ir/
See page 305.
transmission
(Send all Ir data)
Ir/
See page 307.
transmission
(All
transmission)
Memory info
You can display the used memory space
(estimate)/the number of saved files.
Delete all
You can delete all the ToruCa files stored in
the FOMA phone.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Select storage You can set a destination folder for when
copying from the FOMA phone to the
microSD memory card.
YES
Information
pâ
â is displayed when the Genre sort is set, â
â is
displayed when the Title sort is set, and â
â is displayed
when the Index sort is set.
pWhen a file satisfies multiple conditions, it is sorted into the
top of the folder in the ToruCa Folder List.
pThe ToruCa file (details) is copied as a ToruCa file before
obtaining details if it contains data which is prohibited to
output from the FOMA phone or set with UIM restrictions.
pThe ToruCa files in the âToruCaâ folder within the FOMA
phone are saved to âSD ToruCaâ on the microSD memory
card.
227
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
You can set a ToruCa file that matches the
condition to be automatically sorted and
saved to the folder when you obtain the
ToruCa file from the scanning device.
Select a sorting condition.
Genre . . . . Put a check mark for the genre to
).
sort into and press l(
You can put it for multiple
genres.
Title . . . . . . Enter characters from those in
the title, to be a sorting condition.
Index . . . . . Enter characters from those in
the location data, to be a sorting
condition.
Release . . . Select âYESâ to release the
sorting condition you specified.
pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40
half-pitch characters for the Title sort, and
up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters
for the Index sort.
pWhen a sorting condition is already
specified for the folder, it is displayed. Press
i(
) to set a sorting condition
again.
Operation/Explanation
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Auto-sort
You can search through all ToruCa files in the
FOMA phone (except ToruCa files stored in
the âUsed ToruCaâ folder) by specifying a
search condition.
Select a search condition.
Genre . . . Select a genre.
Press l(
) to display a
list of category icons belonging to
the genre.
Title . . . . . Enter characters to be searched
for, from those in the title.
Index . . . . Enter characters to be searched
for, from those in location data.
pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40
half-pitch characters for the Title search,
and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch
characters for the Index search.
Function menu
Information
pThe ToruCa files in âSD ToruCaâ on the microSD memory
card are added or overwritten and then saved to the
âToruCaâ folder in the FOMA phone.
pâ
â is displayed for the folder set as a destination.
pWhen you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder
by using a personal computer, the destination folder on the
microSD memory card might be changed. When the setting
is changed, set the destination folder again.
How to See ToruCa File List/
Detailed ToruCa File Display
Function Menu of the ToruCa File List/Detailed
ToruCa File Display
Function menu
Attach to mail You can compose i-mode mail with the
ToruCa file attached.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
pYou can compose i-mode mail also by
).
pressing l(
Move
Select a destination folder.
pYou cannot select âUsed ToruCaâ folder.
Search/sort
(Search)
[List only]
You can search through ToruCa file in the
folder by specifying a search condition.
SearchSelect a search condition.
Genre . . . . Select a genre.
) to display a
Press l(
list of category icons belonging to
the genre.
Title . . . . . Enter characters to be searched
for, from those in the title.
Index . . . . Enter characters to be searched
for, from those in location data.
pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40
half-pitch characters for the Title search,
and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch
characters for the Index search.
Search/sort
(Sort)
[List only]
You can change the order of displayed files.
SortSelect an order.
Copy
(Copy)
You can copy the displayed or highlighted
ToruCa file to another folder.
CopySelect a destination folder.
pYou cannot select the âUsed ToruCaâ folder.
Copy
(Copy to
microSD)
The files are copied to the folder as specified
by âSelect storageâ on page 227.
Copy to microSD
Copy
(Copy to
phone)
You can copy the ToruCa file from the
microSD memory card to the ToruCa folder in
the FOMA phone.
Copy to phone
ToruCa File List
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Detailed ToruCa File display
(for ToruCa file)
Detailed ToruCa File display
[for ToruCa file (details)]
Indicates the state of ToruCa file
âť1
Unread ToruCa file
Read ToruCa file
âť2
FOMA phone incompatible ToruCa file
âť1 Does not apply to the ToruCa file downloaded from a
site.
âť2 Appears for only the ToruCa file on the microSD
memory card.
p â â is add to the expired ToruCa file.
pâ
â is add to the ToruCa file whose output from the
FOMA phone is prohibited.
Indicates the category
Displays a category icon that matches the contents of the
ToruCa file.
Indicates the Index file
Displays the location data of the publisher that publishes the
information about the ToruCa file.
Indicates the title
Indicates the date and time the ToruCa file was obtained
Indicates the ToruCa information
Simple explanation and the â芳細 (Details)â key are
displayed for a ToruCa file. Information about the publisher
is displayed for a ToruCa file (details).
228
Operation/Explanation
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Multiple-choice You can select multiple ToruCa files and operate.
[List only]
Put a check mark for ToruCa files to be
)Select an item.
selectedi(
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 228.
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 228.
Copy to microSD . . . See page 228.
Copy to phone . . . . . See page 228.
Send Ir data . . . . . . . See page 305.
Select all . . . . . . . . . . Selects all files.
Release all . . . . . . . . . Releases all selections.
Update
ToruCa
[Detailed
display only]
You can re-obtain the information about the
ToruCa file. The re-obtained ToruCa file (details)
is automatically overwritten and then saved.
YES
pYou cannot update some ToruCa files.
pSee page 162 for when ToruCa files are
stored to the maximum.
Operate image You can save the image displayed on the
(Save image) ToruCa file and set it for the Stand-by display
[Detailed
or Wake-up display.
display only] Save imageSelect an imageYES
Select a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 159.
pSee page 162 for when images are stored
to the maximum.
Operate image You can play back an animation image or
(Retry)
Flash movie in the ToruCa file from the
[Detailed
beginning.
display only] Retry
Add to
phonebook
[Detailed
display only]
See page 87.
Add desktop See page 114.
icon
Ir/
See page 305.
transmission
(Send Ir data)
Ir/
See page 306.
transmission
transmission)
Memory info
[List only]
You can display the used memory space
(estimate)/the number of saved files.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
Operation/Explanation
Delete
(Delete
selected)
[List only]
Delete selectedPut a check mark for
ToruCa files to be deletedl(
YES
Delete
(Delete all)
[List only]
You can delete all ToruCa files in the folder.
Delete allEnter your Terminal Security
CodeYES
Information
pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output
from the FOMA phone is prohibited is attached as a ToruCa
file before obtaining details.
pYou might not be able to attach the ToruCa file to i-mode
mail depending on its file size.
pYou cannot copy ToruCa files whose output from the FOMA
phone is prohibited.
pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output
from the FOMA phone is prohibited or the data set with the
UIM restrictions is copied as a ToruCa file before obtaining
details.
pWhen the number of files in the destination folder on the
microSD memory card is full, a new folder is automatically
created and ToruCa files are saved to that folder.
When copying is completed, the message âThis folder is set
for storage XXXXXXâ (XXXXXX denotes a folder name)
appears.
pThe name of copied ToruCa file is TORUCXXX (XXX
denotes a numeral).
pWhen no folder is set as a destination folder on the microSD
memory card, a new folder is created automatically and the
file is saved to the folder. After saving, the newly created
folder is set as the destination folder.
pYou might not be able to execute âCopy to microSDâ for the
ToruCa file depending on its file size.
pYou might not be able to execute âCopy to phoneâ for the
ToruCa file depending on its file size.
pThe images that satisfy the following conditions are saved
as frames or stamps:
ăťThe transparent GIF file that is not an animation GIF file
ăťThe file extension is âifmâ.
ăťThe image size is Stand-by (480 x 854), VGA (640 x 480),
CIF (352 x 288), QVGA (240 x 320), QCIF (176 x 144), or
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) for frames; and Stand-by (480 x 854)
or smaller except frames for stamps.
229
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Operate image You can save the background image of the
ToruCa file and set it for the Stand-by display
(Save BG
or Wake-up display.
image)
[Detailed
Save BG imageYES
display only] Select a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 159.
pSee page 162 for when images are stored
to the maximum.
Function menu
< ToruCa Settings>
< IC Card Lock>
Setting about ToruCa
Locking IC Card Function
mOsaifu-KeitaiSettings
Do the following operations.
Item
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Receive
ToruCa
Operation/Explanation
You can set whether to obtain ToruCa file
from a scanning device using the IC card
function.
Accept or Reject
Receiving
display
You can set whether to display the detailed
ToruCa File display when you obtain a
ToruCa file while the Stand-by display is
shown.
ON or OFF
Check same
data
You can set whether to check the same
ToruCa file is already obtained before
obtaining a ToruCa file from a scanning
device.
ON or OFF
ON . . . Checks and does not obtain a new
ToruCa file if the same ToruCa file is
already obtained.
OFF . . Does not check. Obtains even the
same ToruCa file.
Auto reading You can set whether to have the available
ToruCa files automatically recognized for
when you place the FOMA phone over the
scanning device.
Accept or Reject
Information
pThe ToruCa files stored in âUsed ToruCaâ or expired
ToruCa files are not included as target files.
pIf âAuto readingâ is set to âRejectâ, you might not be able to
use ToruCa files.
230
To prevent the IC card function from being used by
others, you can set the Osaifu-Keitai, obtained ToruCa,
or iC communication disabled.
pIf the battery runs out when the IC card is locked, the IC card
stays locked.
Press and hold m for at least one second.
â â appears and IC Card Lock is set.
pTo release IC Card Lock, perform the same operation
and enter your Terminal Security Code.
When you set Timer Lock At Close, the display for
releasing IC Card Lock appears also by opening the
FOMA phone.
When you set âPIM/IC security modeâ to âFace readerâ,
follow the operation of âUse Face Reader to Release
Lockâ on page 124.
When you set it to âDouble securityâ, enter your
Terminal Security Code after the operation on
page 124.
IC Lock (Power-off)
You can set whether to lock the IC card function while
the power is turned off.
m
1 LockSettingsLock/Security
setting
or
mOsaifu-KeitaiIC card lock set.
IC lock (power-off)
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Select an item.
Setting before OFF
. . . . . . . . Follows the setting at just before the
power-off.
Lock . . . . Sets IC Card Lock.
GPS Function
About Using GPS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
Checking Your Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšPosition Locationâş
232
Using GPS Compatible i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšGPS Compatible i-Îąppliâş
233
Providing Location Information upon Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšProvide Locationâş
237
Notifying Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšNotify of Locationâş
238
Displaying Location Information History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšLocation Historyâş
238
Configuring GPS Service Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšService Settingsâş
239
Setting GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšGPS Settingsâş
239
231
About Using GPS Function
pGPS is operated by the United States Department of
Defense, so the GPS radio wave conditions might be
controlled (accuracy deterioration, radio wave supply
suspension, etc.) depending on the defense strategy of the
United States Department of Defense.
pNote that we do not take any responsibility for a loss such as
pure economic loss resulting from the facts that you have
missed the chance to check the measurement
(communication) results, which have been caused by
external factors such as malfunctions, erroneous operations,
troubles, or power failure (including battery shortage) on the
FOMA phone.
pYou cannot use the FOMA phone as a navigating system for
aircraft, vehicles, and people. Therefore, note that we are not
held responsible for any damage resulting from the use of
the location information for navigation.
pYou cannot use GPS as a high-accuracy measuring device.
Note that we do not take any responsibility for the damage
caused by an error in the location information.
pYou cannot use the GPS function when the FOMA phone is
out of the service area (or overseas).
GPS Function
Information
pYou cannot use the GPS function in the following cases:
ăťDuring Lock Allâť
ăťDuring Self Mode
ăťDuring Omakase Lockâť
ăťWhile the UIM is not inserted
âťProvide Location is available.
pAs GPS uses radio waves transmitted from the satellites,
note that you cannot or might have difficulty to receive radio
waves in the following conditions:
ăťIn a building or right under it
ăťIn the basement, tunnel, ground, water
ăťIn a bag or case
ăťIn densely crowded areas with buildings and houses
ăťIn densely crowded trees and right under them
ăťClose to high-tension wires
ăťIn a car or train
ăťIn bad weather such as heavy rain and snow
ăťWhen there are obstacles (persons and articles) around
the FOMA phone.
ăťWhen you cover the displays, keys, microphone, or
speakers of the FOMA phone with your hand.
In these cases, an error in the obtained location information
might become 300 meters or more.
232
< Position Location>
Checking Your Location
You can measure your current location and display it.
You can display a map of the location, and send the
location information by mail as well.
mLifeKitGPSPosition location
Blinks during measuring
The current location is displayed by the latitude and longitude.
âŚMeasurement date âŚLatitude âŚLongitude
âŚGeographic datum
âŚAccuracy
â
â
â
: Almost accurate location information
(Error is about less than 50 meters)
â
â
â: Relatively accurate location information (Error
is less than about 300 meters)
â
ââ: Approximate location information
(Error is about 300 meters or more)
The accuracy is an estimate. It might differ from actual
one depending on the radio wave conditions in the
surrounding area.
pPress l(
) to measure again in âQuality modeâ
(see âPositioning Modeâ on page 239).
pWhen â
â is displayed at bottom right of the display
during measuring, press i and select âOKâ to display
the location using the information during measuring.
pYou can measure the location also by pressing and
holding 1 for at least one second from the Stand-by
display. After measuring, the FOMA phone works
according to the setting of âGPS Button Settingâ (see
page 239).
Function Menu while Current Location is Displayed
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Read a map
You can display a map by connecting a map site.
YES
pAfter displaying the map, you can use
âi-areaâ to search for the surrounding
information. For details about âi-areaâ, refer
to the DoCoMo web site.
Run iÎąppli
You can use the current location information
on a GPS compatible i-Îąppli program.
Select an i-Îąppli program.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Paste to mail You can paste the current location information
converted to a URL to text and compose
i-mode mail.
YES
Go to step 2 on page 172.
pThe URL of the location information to be
sent is displayed on i-mode compatible
phones only.
Add to
phonebook
Attach to
image
You can store the current location information
in the Phonebook.
YES
Go to step 1 on page 84.
You can store the current location information
in the image.
Go to step 1 of âDisplaying Imagesâ on
page 274.
< GPS Compatible i-Îąppli>
Using GPS Compatible i-Îąppli
mLifeKitGPSiÎąppli
The list of i-Îąppli programs that support GPS is displayed.
Select an i-Îąppli program to start it.
pSee page 211 for the Software List.
pYou need to set âLocation usageâ of âSoftware settingâ to
âONâ when you use the GPS function on a GPS compatible
i-Îąppli program.
Using âĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)â
Descriptions
äťăăĺ ´ć pYou can use GPS to see the
map you are currently in, or send
(Current
the map by i-mode mail.
point)
pYou can leave your footprint on
the map where you are currently
in, check your traces, and see
other peopleâs footprints.
pYou
can check the details of shops,
ĺ¨čžşă調ăšă
facilities,
or iD member stores in
(Check
the
area
where
you are currently in
nearby area)
or you specify, and can download
coupons from gourmet information.
pYou can check nearby weather
status or spare spaces in
parking lots.
ĺ°ĺłăčŚă pYou can enter a keyword, a
(See map) genre, address, or phone
number to see the map.
pYou can check the points stored
in this software program, on the
server, or in the Phonebook, or
check the map for the points
retrieved by the previous search.
pAfter the storage on the server,
the stored points are shared with
your personal computer.
pYou
can navigate yourself to the
ăăăăă
destination
by vehicle, on foot, or
(Navigate)
by car.
pYou can navigate yourself easily
to your home you have stored.
äšććĄĺ
pYou can check the train transfer
guides and timetables.
(Transfer
pYou can check the map for train
guide)
routes and set an alarm before
your departure.
pBy
voice input, you can easily
ăăăăšă
checks
the details of your nearby
ć¤ç´˘
area or see the map.
(Voice
pBy voice input, you can easily
search)
guide you to train transfers.
pYou
can move the map or 3D map
č¨ĺŽďźç´ćâ
by
inclining
the FOMA phone.
(Settings/
Intuitionâ
) pYou can set how to show the
map or navigation, and check
how to use them.
Up to From 91
90 days days on
Free Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free Charged
Free Charged
Free Charged
Free
Free
Free Charged
Free
Free
Free
Free
233
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
The pre-installed âĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)â
enables you to check the map for where you are
currently in or for the place you specify, or check your
nearby area for details by using the GPS function and
map. You can then navigate yourself to the destination
by vehicle, on foot, or by car.
Further, you can easily get train information by voice
input.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
You are advised to subscribe to Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai
Full for using âĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)â.
pIf you delete this application program and then when you
want to resume it, download it from âď˝ă¨ăŞă˘âĺ¨čžşć
ĺ ąâ
(i-area -Local Information-)â.
pThis application program is a mail-linked i-Îąppli program, so
it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode.
pNote that we are not held responsible for the accuracy and
promptness of the map and route information.
pWhile driving, ensure that a person other than the driver
operates âĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)â.
Menu
GPS Function
Information
pWhen you use a GPS compatible i-Îąppli program, the
location information is sent to the information provider of the
i-Îąppli program you use.
â Standard and optional services
The standard and optional services are available with this
application program.
Standard service: Provided by DoCoMo (charge free).
Optional service: Provided by ZENRIN DataCom (charged).
You can use the optional services charge free except traffic
information for up to 90 days from when you have started this
application program for the first time. To use the optional
services from 91 days on, you need to register yourself as a
member of âăźăłăŞăł ĺ°ĺłďźăă (ZENRIN/map+navi)â
(charged) provided by ZENRIN DataCom.
Even when you register yourself as a member while you are
using this software program, you do not need to re-download
it. You can use the software program as it is.
â Top menu display and its operation
The respective menus are displayed on
the TOP display. When you close the
menu, the map retrieved by the last
search appears.
pThe displays are for reference, so the
actual ones might differ.
pAt the first start-up, the usage rules
and caution items on use are
displayed.
âKey operation when the quick access menu appears
Key operation
Action
Zo[ĺ¨čžşă調ăšă Checks the details of the nearby area
(Check nearby area)] mainly on the displayed map.
Xo[ăłăłă¸ăă
(Navi to)]
Specifies the start point and searches the
route to the center of the map.
Co[ăłăłăé俥
(Send here)]
Sends the URL for the displayed map via
i-mode mail.
Vo[ăłăłăçťé˛
(Store here)]
Stores the positional information of the
center of the map in this software
program, on the server, or in the
Phonebook. When you store it on the
server, the stored point can be shared
with your personal computer as well.
Oo[ĺ°ĺłă¸ (To
map)]
Closes the quick access menu.
TOP display
âWhen 91 days have passed without registering yourself
as a member
At the first start-up after 91 days, the
message telling that your privilege to
use the functions is limited, and the
message that refers to the registration
site appear. The same messages
appear when you select a menu for
optional services.
âťTo register yourself as a member,
access âăźăłăŞăł ĺ°ĺłďźăă
(ZENRIN/map+navi)â via this
software program.
GPS Function
â Map display and its operation
1[3DďźăăăŠă Shows the point from where 3D
intersection or panoramic images can be
(3D/Panorama)]
viewed. Select the point to display 3D
intersection and panoramic images.
2[ăăŤďźăă Shows the buildings around and can click
to check the tenants in the buildings if
ăłă (Building/
any.
Tenant)]
â The Search Result display for the nearby area details
and its operation
pThe display is for reference, so the actual one might differ.
pThe display and operation are for when you show the search
result on the map, not for when you select it on the list.
âThe Search Result display for the nearby area details
Š ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
Map View display
âKey operation when the map appears
Key operation
Action
l[ăĄăăĽăź
(Menu)]
Shows the menu.
Oo
Shows the quick access menu.
i[ćĄç¸Ž
(Enlarge/
Reduce)]
Shows the bar that shows reduced scale.
To enlarge and display the map, press
Zo, and to display the details, press Xo.
Press i[éăă (close)] to fix the
reduced scale, and then to clear the bar.
Mo
Moves the map up, down, left, and right.
Closes the menu, or returns to the point
retrieved by the first search.
Turns the map to the left.
Turns the map northward.
Turns the map to the right.
234
Š ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
âKey operation when the Search Result display for the
nearby area is shown
âťWhen the cursor is not placed over the shop retrieved by the
search, the quick menu appears.
Key operation
Action
Oo
Confirms detailed information about search results.
Mo
Moves the map up, down, left, and right.
Re-searches the center area of the map
being displayed.
Shows the previous search results.
Shows the next search results.
l[ăĄăăĽăź Shows the menu.
(Menu)]
Key operation
i[ćĄç¸Ž
(Enlarge/
Reduce)]
Action
Shows the bar that shows reduced scale. To
enlarge and display the map, press Zo, and
to display the details, press Xo. Press
i[éăă (close)] to fix the reduced scale,
and then to clear the bar.
Searching Route and Navigating Yourself to
Destination by Voice and on Display
You can specify the start point and destination, and
search the route. The route you can go through on foot,
by public transportation, or by car are displayed. After
you search the route, the voice and display navigate
you to your destination.
ćéćĺŽ (Specify time)Select an item.
ćĄäťśč¨ĺŽ (Set conditions)
Select a condition.
äšććĄäťś (Transfer conditions)
. . . Select transfer condition from âćŠă (Fast)â, âĺŽă
(Cheap)â, and â漽ă
(Easy)â.
ĺžćŠăŤăźă (Foot route)
. . . Select a foot route from âăăžăă (Free)â, âĺąć šĺ¤ă
(Many roofs)â, and âé掾ĺ°ăŞă (Less stairs)â.
çšćĽĺŠç¨ (Use special express)
. . . Select whether to use special expresses when the
total distance is less than 100 km.
é常ĺŠç¨čťç¨Ž (Ordinary type of vehicles)
. . . Select a type of vehicle.
Map View displayl[ăĄăăĽăź (Menu)]
ăăăăă (Navigate)ăăăăă (Navigate)
ĺşçşĺ° (Start point)Select a setting method.
çžĺ¨ĺ° (GPS) [Current location (GPS)]
. . . Measures and sets the current location.
ăăŞăźăŻăźăć¤ç´˘ (Keyword search)
. . . Searches and sets the start point by keywords.
ĺ°ĺłä¸ă§ćĺŽ (Specify on map)
. . . Specifies the start point on the map.
TELďźăć¤ç´˘ (TEL/ZIP code search)
. . . Searches and sets the start point by the phone
number or zip code.
ä˝ćä¸čŚ§ăă (From address list)
. . . Selects the address and sets the start point.
ă¸ăŁăłăŤăă (From genre)
. . . Selects a genre and sets the start point.
幼ć´ăă (From record)
. . . Sets the start point on the map previously displayed.
çťé˛ĺ°çšăă (From stored point)
. . . Sets the start point from the location information stored in
this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook.
čŞĺŽ
(Home)
. . . Sets the start point from the location information of
your home.
ĺşçşĺ°ăŽç˘şčŞ (Confirm start point)
. . . Confirms information about the start point.
çŽçĺ° (Destination)Select a setting method.
ä¸č¨ă§č¨ĺŽ (Fix as specified above)
ăŤăźăăć¤ç´˘ (Search the route)
You can search the route by â
ă§ć¤ç´˘
(Search by
)â of Total Navi, or â
ăŽăżă§ć¤
ç´˘ (Search by only
)â that searches only routes by
cars. Up to six routes are displayed as search results.
When the routes using different transportation are found,
the characteristics of the routes are displayed by the
icons shown below:
ćŠ (Fast): Arrival time is early.
ĺŽ (Cheap): Fare is cheap.
漽 (Easy): Transfer is less.
ăŞăšăšăĄ (Recommendable):
Route provided with three conditions, âćŠ (Fast)â, âĺŽ
(Cheap)â, and â漽 (Easy)â.
ćć (Charged): Route by cars using toll roads
ä¸čŹ (Ordinary): Route by cars using ordinary roads
pTo store the route, select âăŤăźăăçťé˛ (Store route)â.
Select a route
ăăăťăŤăźăç˘şčŞ (Navi/Confirm route)
ăă (Navi) or ăăďźçéťĺďź[Navi (power
saver)]
Navigation to the destination starts.
pTo confirm the route, select âăŤăźăç˘şčŞ (Confirm
route)â.
pTo check the timetables, select âćĺťčĄ¨ (Timetables)â.
235
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
ăăŞăźăŻăźăć¤ç´˘ (Keyword search)
. . . Searches and sets the destination by keywords.
ĺ°ĺłä¸ă§ćĺŽ (Specify on map)
. . . Specifies the destination on the map.
TELďźăć¤ç´˘ (TEL/ZIP code search)
. . . Searches and sets the destination by the phone
number or zip code.
ä˝ćä¸čŚ§ăă (From address list)
. . . Selects the address and sets the destination.
ă¸ăŁăłăŤăă (From genre)
. . . Selects a genre and sets the destination.
幼ć´ăă (From record)
. . . Sets the destination on the map previously displayed.
çťé˛ĺ°çšăă (From stored point)
. . . Sets the destination from the location information stored in
this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook.
čŞĺŽ
(Home)
. . . Sets the destination from the location information of
your home.
çŽçĺ°ăŽç˘şčŞ (Confirm destination)
. . . Confirms information about the destination.
çžćĺťă§ć¤ç´˘ (Search by current time)
. . . Searches the route by the current time.
ĺşçşćĺťćĺŽ (Specify start time)
. . . Specifies the start time and searches the route.
ĺ°çćĺťćĺŽ (Specify arrival time)
. . . Specifies the arrival time and searches the route.
çľéťăĺŠç¨ (Use last train)
. . . Searches the route by the last train of the day.
GPS Function
â Route (Car)/Navigation (Car) View display and its operation
pThe displays are for reference, so the actual ones might differ.
The current location
and proceeding
direction is
displayed.
Using ăăăăšăć¤ç´˘ (Voice search)
By voice input, you can easily check the details of your
nearby area, get transfer information, or see the map
from the Voice search menu.
When using ăăăăšăć¤ç´˘ (Voice search)
to check the details of your nearby area
The route to
the destination
is displayed.
Route (Car) View
display
How to input your voice is displayed.
Navigation (Car) View
display
Š ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
âKey operation when using Navigation
GPS Function
Key operation
Action
l[ăĄăăĽăź
(Menu)]
Ends the Navigation program and shows
the TOP menu.
Oo
Shows the quick access menu.
i[ćĄç¸Ž
(Enlarge/
Reduce)]
Shows the bar that shows reduced scale.
To enlarge and display the map, press
Zo, and to display the details, press Xo.
Press i[éăă (Close)] to fix the
reduced scale, and then to clear the bar.
Mo
Moves the map up, down, left, and right.
Returns to the current location.
Switches to intersection mode.
Pauses or starts the Navigation program.
Turns the map to the left.
Turns the map northward.
Turns the map to the right.
âKey operation when the quick access menu appears
Key operation
Action
Xo[ć¤ç´˘çľćďź
č¨ĺŽ (Search
result&Settings)]
Shows the search result of the route (time
and fare, and others), or sets the
Navigation program.
Co[çľçąĺ°č¨ĺŽ
(Set junction)]
Sets up to three junctions of the route to
the destination and searches.
[ăŞăŤăźă
(Re-route)]
Re-searches the route from the current
location to the destination.
1[ăŤăźăćśĺť Clears the route being displayed.
(Clear route)]
2[ă˘ăźăĺćż Switches to junction mode.
(Switch mode)]
3[ć¸ćťć
ĺ ą Shows the traffic jam information linked to
the map being displayed.
(Traffic jam
information)]
âťOnly for car route
236
TOP displayăăăăšăć¤ç´˘ (Voice search)
ĺ¨čžşă調ăšă (Check nearby area)
Explanatory display for voice input
éłĺŁ°ĺ
Ľĺéĺ§ (Start voice input)
The display for voice input appears. After the Voice Input
display appears, speak in Japanese about the details of
nearby area you want to search.
Example: âKonohen-no Konbiniâ (nearby convenience
store)
A confirmation display appears
after your voice is recognized.
When the recognition is wrong,
select âéłĺŁ°ĺĺ
Ľĺ(Re-input
voice)â.
Using Settings and Help
TOP displayč¨ĺŽďźç´ćâ
(Settings/
Institutionâ
)č¨ĺŽăťăăŤă (Settings/Help)
Select an item.
Item
Action
äźĺĄć
ĺ ąç˘şčŞ
You can check whether you are
(Confirm member registered as a member of âăźăłăŞăł
ĺ°ĺłďźăă (ZENRIN/map+navi)â.
information)
ÎąĺşćŹč¨ĺŽ
(Îą Standard
settings)
You can perform the overall settings of
the software program such as specifying
map display color or font size.
ăăč¨ĺŽ
(Navi settings)
You can perform the overall settings of
the navigation program such as re-routing
or the sound level of voice guide.
čŞĺŽ
č¨ĺŽ
(Home setting)
You can register the place of your home.
幼ć´çłťăŻăŞă˘
(Clear records)
Clears the records of the map or
Navigation used.
使ăćšăŽčŞŹćďźă You can get explanation about how to
ăăă質ĺďźĺŠç¨ use, FAQ, and usage rules.
čŚç´ (Explanation
about how to use/
FAQ/Usage rules)
< Provide Location>
You can provide your location information upon the request
from others. Depending on the service you use, you need to
set GPS service settings beforehand. (See page 239) Also,
you need to set âLocation request menuâ to âONâ or set the
permitted period by âPermission scheduleâ beforehand.
When a location provision request arrives
YES or NO
YES . . . Measures the current
location and sends the
location information.
NO . . . . Rejects to provide the
location information.
pIf no keys are pressed for about
20 seconds, the former display
returns without providing your
current location.
ĺŽďźă¤ăăăłăľăźăč¨ĺŽďź[Location Information Usage
Setting (imadoco-search Setting)] of âăŞăăˇă§ăłč¨ĺŽ
(Options)â of âćéďźăçłčžźăťč¨ĺŽ (Bill & Subscription/
Setting)â on iMenu.
pTo use Provide Location, you might need to subscribe to a
service provider which supports the Provider Location
function or to pay the service fee.
pEven when you send your location information, it might not
be delivered to the service provider depending on the radio
wave conditions.
pWhen âLocation request menuâ is set to âOFFâ, the location
information is not displayed, and the request is rejected.
pWhen you set, by GPS service settings, the location request
to be checked every time, the location information is not
provided on the location provision request during Public
Mode (Drive Mode).
pWhen you set, by GPS service settings, the location request
to be accepted, the location information is provided with a
display during Public Mode (Drive Mode) but the positioning
tone, vibrator, and illumination do not work.
pWhen you are requested to provide your location
information from the other party using âimadocokantan
searchâ, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
send the current location information each time you receive
a request. Select âYESâ to immediately send the rough
position location result. After selecting âYESâ, the GPS
Measuring display appears and the precise position location
result is notified after GPS measuring. The rough position
location result is notified even if you suspend the location
providing during GPS measuring. In this case, it is stored in
Location History but the location information is not
displayed.
pRegardless of the mode of 2in1, the location information
can be searched for Number A only.
When the other party searches you by your Number B, your
current location is not provided and the searcher is notified
that the search has failed.
pA fee is not charged for using the Provide Location function.
pFor using the service, refer to the information on your
service provider or the DoCoMo web page.
When a location provision request arrivesOK
pWhen you select âOKâ or about
three seconds elapse, the
current location provision starts.
pThe information of the service
provider might not be displayed.
pPress r to stop providing
information.
However, your location
information might be sent depending on the timing.
237
GPS Function
Providing Location Information
upon Request
Information
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds from the
Position Location Result display or the Failure display, the
former display returns.
pTo use âimadoco-searchâ, you need to set âä˝ç˝Žć
ĺ ąĺŠç¨č¨
< Notify of Location>
Notifying Location Information
You can notify a service provider of your current location.
mLifeKitGPSNotify of location
Direct inputEnter a party to be notified
YES
Information
pThe location information and accuracy stored in Location
History may differ from the ones sent to the location
provision requester or LCS client depending on the radio
wave conditions, and others.
pWhen you cancel Position Location midway, you fail to
measure your current location, or you set âLocation request
menuâ to âOFFâ, its history is not stored in Location History.
pEven when the histories of Provide Location or Notify Of
Location are stored, they might not have been delivered to
your service providers.
pYou cannot operate other than âCompose messageâ,
âDialingâ, âDelete thisâ and âDelete allâ for a failed-tomeasure history of Provide Location or Notify of Location.
pWhen Provide Location was used, the name of the location
provision requester is checked against the Phonebook
entries which appear in each mode of 2in1 and then shown.
pYou can enter up to 12 digits by using numerals, # and :.
pIf you have stored LCS clients by âReg. LCS clientâ
beforehand, you can select an LCS client from âView
service clientsâ.
pYou can press l(
) to stop measuring, but your
current location might be notified depending on the timing.
GPS Function
pâ
â is displayed for the records of successful positioning.
Function Menu while Location History is Displayed
Function menu
Read a map
You can display a map by connecting a map
site.
YES
pAfter displaying the map, you can use
âi-areaâ to search for the information of the
surrounding area. For details on âi-areaâ,
refer to the DoCoMo web site.
Run iÎąppli
You can use the current location information
on a GPS compatible i-Îąppli program.
Select an i-Îąppli program.
OK
Information
pEven when you send your location information, it might not
be delivered to the service provider depending on the radio
wave conditions.
pYou are charged a fee for using the function to notify your
current location.
pTo use Notify Of Location, you might need to subscribe to a
service provider that supports Notify Of Location. Further,
you might be charged a fee for using the service.
pYou cannot enter any digits during Keypad Dial Lock.
pRegardless of the mode of 2in1, your location information is
notified by Number A.
pFor using the service, refer to the information on your
service provider or the DoCoMo web page.
< Location History>
Displaying Location Information History
Paste to mail You can paste the location information
converted to a URL to text and compose
i-mode mail.
YES
Go to step 2 on page 172.
Add to
phonebook
You can store the location information in the
Phonebook.
YES
Go to step 1 on page 84.
Attach to
image
You can store the location information in the
image.
Go to step 1 of âDisplaying Imagesâ on
page 274.
Compose
message
You can compose i-mode mail messages to
your location provision requester.
Go tostep 3 on page 172.
Dialing
See page 148.
Delete
(Delete this)
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Up to 50 histories of Position Location, Notify Of
Location, and Provide Location are stored.
mLifeKitGPSLocation history
Select a location history.
Position location
Provide location
Notify of location
Information
pWhen the location histories exceed 50, they are
automatically overwritten from the oldest one.
238
Operation/Explanation
Item
< Service Settings>
Configuring GPS Service Settings
By connecting to GPS service settings (a host set by
âHost selectionâ), you can configure the settings for
the Provide Location service such as the permission
for location information search and password.
mLifeKitGPSService settings
pSee page 153 for operations while a site is displayed.
Ring time
setting
You can set a ring time for positioning ring tone.
Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter two digits from â00â through â30â. For
âLocation req./Confirmâ, however, enter two
digits from â00â through â20â. If you set to 0
seconds, the tone does not sound.
Select
vibrator
Select a vibration pattern.
pIf you select âMelody linkageâ, the FOMA
phone vibrates in time with ring tone.
pWhile selecting, the FOMA phone vibrates
by the selected pattern for confirmation.
Select
illumination
Select a color.
pWhile selecting, the Call/Charging indicator
lights in the selected color for confirmation.
Information
pYou cannot use the Bookmark or Screen Memo function.
< GPS Settings>
Setting GPS
GPS Button Setting
You can set an operation for after measuring your
location by pressing and holding 1 for at least one
second from the Stand-by display.
mLifeKitGPSGPS settings
GPS button settingSelect an operation.
Positioning Tone/Illumination
You can select a tone to sound for when you check your
current location or when you are requested to provide
location information. You can set a color of the Call/
Charging indicator and the vibration pattern as well.
mLifeKitGPSGPS settings
Posit. tone/illum.
Select an operation to be set
Do the following operations.
Item
Select a folderSelect a ring tone.
pWhile selecting, the selected tone sounds
for confirmation.
mLifeKitGPSGPS settings
Positioning mode
Select an operation to be set
Standard mode or Quality mode
Register LCS Client
If you have stored LCS clients, you can select an LCS
client when you notify of your current location. Further,
you can automatically notify of your current location
when you make a call to the stored phone number.
You can store up to five LCS clients.
mLifeKitGPSGPS settings
Reg. LCS clientHighlight
and press l(
) or Oo(
Do the following operations.
pIf you select a stored LCS client, you can confirm the
stored contents.
Item
Operation/Explanation
Service client Enter a service client name.
name
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32
half-pitch characters.
Service client Enter a service client ID.
pYou can enter up to 12 digits by using
ID
numerals, # and :.
pEnter the service client ID specified by your
service provider.
239
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Select posit.
ring tone
Operation/Explanation
Positioning Mode
Select a mode for measuring the current location from
either âStandard modeâ or âQuality modeâ.
When you select âQuality modeâ, it takes a longer time
for measuring, but the measuring accuracy might be
improved as a result.
You can set a measuring mode for Position Location,
Notify Of Location, and Provide Location respectively.
GPS Function
Read a map . . . . . . . . Displays a map by connecting to
a map site.
Run iÎąppli. . . . . . . . Displays a list of GPS compatible
i-Îąppli programs.
Paste to mail . . . . . . . Pastes the location information
converted to a URL to text and
compose i-mode mail.
Add to phonebook . . Stores the current location
information in the Phonebook.
Attach to image . . . . Stores the current location
information in the image.
Confirm every session
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selects an operation each time
you measure the location.
Operation/Explanation
Item
Phone
number
Notify when
dialing
Operation/Explanation
Location Request Menu
Enter a phone number.
pYou can enter up to 26 digits.
pHighlight the phone number field, press
i(
), and select âEnter from PBâ to
call up a phone number from the
Phonebook and enter it.
pIf you enter a phone number by âEnter from
PBâ with âService client nameâ not entered,
the name for the Phonebook entry is
entered.
You can set whether to notify of your current
location for when you make a voice call or
videophone call to the stored phone number.
ON, OFF or Confirm every dial
pTo check each time you make a call, select
âConfirm every dialâ.
Press l(
Function Menu while LCS Client is Displayed
GPS Function
mLifeKitGPSGPS settings
Location request menu
Enter your Terminal Security Code
ON, OFF or Permission schedule
Do the following operations.
Item
Delete thisYES
Delete
(Delete all)
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Add to
phonebook
You can store the service client name and
phone number stored in âReg. LCS clientâ into
the Phonebook.
YES
Go to step 1 on page 84.
Edit
Go to step 1 of âRegister LCS Clientâ on
page 239.
pYou can edit also by pressing l(
Send Ir data
See page 305.
Send all Ir
data
See page 305.
See page 306.
transmission
All
See page 307.
transmission
).
Operation/Explanation
Permit from
Enter the time for starting permission.
Permit to
Enter the time for ending permission.
Repeat
Select a repeat type.
pWhen you select â1 timeâ, the permission
period does not repeat.
pWhen you select âSelect dayâ, put a check
mark for days of the week to be repeated,
then press l(
).
Validity period When you set to âRepeatâ, you can set the
period to be valid.
ON or OFFEnter a validity date (from).
ON or OFFEnter a validity date (to).
Operation/Explanation
Delete
(Delete this)
240
).
Information
pEven if âNotify when dialingâ is set to âONâ or to âConfirm
every dialâ, you cannot notify of your current location when
you make a call without notifying of your caller ID.
Function menu
You can set whether to accept a location provision
request (provide location information). You can set
validity period as well.
Press l(
).
Information
pYou can set âLocation request menuâ also by âInitial settingâ
(see page 45).
pWhen âONâ is set, the location information might be sent
without any operation on the FOMA phone, and might be
notified to the searcher.
pWhen âOFFâ is set, the location provision is rejected even if
its location provision request is received. The history is not
stored.
pYou can specify from January 1, 2007 through December
31, 2037 for âPermission scheduleâ.
â Operations when the validity period for location
provision is specified
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/15/Nov/
2007 and you set 14:00 as the start time and 21:00
as the end time
Repeat Validity period
Period of location provision
1 time
14:00/15/Nov/2007 through
21:00/15/Nov/2007
Repeat
Daily
Validity period
Start date:
20/Nov/2007
End date:
30/Nov/2007
Start date:
10/Nov/2007
End date:
30/Nov/2007
OFF
Select day Start date:
20/Nov/2007
End date:
30/Nov/2007
Start date:
10/Nov/2007
End date:
30/Nov/2007
OFF
Period of location provision
Every day 14:00 through 21:00
from 20/Nov/2007 through 30/
Nov/2007
Every day 14:00 through 21:00
from 15/Nov/2007 through 30/
Nov/2007
Every day 14:00 through 21:00
on and after 15/Nov/2007
14:00 through 21:00 of the
specified days of the week
from 20/Nov/2007 through 30/
Nov/2007
14:00 through 21:00 of the
specified days of the week
from 15/Nov/2007 through 30/
Nov/2007
14:00 through 21:00 of the
specified days of the week on
and after 15/Nov/2007
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/15/Nov/
2007 and you set 10:00 as the start time and 10:00
as the end time
Repeat Validity period
Period of location provision
1 time
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
10:00/16/Nov/2007
Daily
Start date:
10:00/20/Nov/2007 through
20/Nov/2007
10:00/1/Dec/2007
End date:
30/Nov/2007
Start date:
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
10/Nov/2007
10:00/1/Dec/2007
End date:
30/Nov/2007
OFF
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
10:00/16/Nov/2007, every day
10:00 through 10:00 of the next
day on and after 16/Nov/2007
Select day Start date:
10:00 through 10:00 of the
20/Nov/2007
next days of the specified days
End date:
of the week from 20/Nov/2007
30/Nov/2007
through 30/Nov/2007
Start date:
If 15/Nov/2007 is the specified
10/Nov/2007
day;
End date:
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
30/Nov/2007
10:00/16/Nov/2007, 10:00
through 10:00 of the next days
of the specified days of the
week from 16/Nov/2007
through 30/Nov/2007
OFF
If 15/Nov/2007 is the specified
day;
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
10:00/16/Nov/2007, 10:00
through 10:00 of the next day
of the specified days of the
week on and after 16/Nov/2007
241
GPS Function
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/15/Nov/
2007 and you set 10:00 as the start time and 21:00
as the end time
Repeat Validity period
Period of location provision
1 time
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
21:00/15/Nov/2007
Daily
Start date:
Every day 10:00 through 21:00
20/Nov/2007
from 20/Nov/2007 through 30/
End date:
Nov/2007
30/Nov/2007
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
Start date:
21:00/15/Nov/2007, every day
10/Nov/2007
10:00 through 21:00 from 16/
End date:
Nov/2007 through 30/Nov/2007
30/Nov/2007
OFF
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
21:00/15/Nov/2007, every day
10:00 through 21:00 on and
after 16/Nov/2007
Select day Start date:
10:00 through 21:00 of the
20/Nov/2007
specified days of the week
End date:
from 20/Nov/2007 through 30/
30/Nov/2007
Nov/2007
Start date:
If 15/Nov/2007 is the specified
10/Nov/2007
day;
End date:
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
30/Nov/2007
21:00/15/Nov/2007,
10:00 through 21:00 of the
specified days of the week
from 16/Nov/2007 through 30/
Nov/2007
OFF
If 15/Nov/2007 is the specified
day;
12:00/15/Nov/2007 through
21:00/15/Nov/2007,
10:00 through 21:00 of the
specified days of the week on
and after 16/Nov/2007
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/15/Nov/
2007 and you set 14:00 as the start time and 10:00
as the end time
Repeat Validity period
Period of location provision
1 time
14:00/15/Nov/2007 through
10:00/16/Nov/2007
Daily
Start date:
14:00 through 10:00 of the
20/Nov/2007
next day from 20/Nov/2007
End date:
through 30/Nov/2007
30/Nov/2007
Start date:
14:00 through 10:00 of the
10/Nov/2007
next day from 15/Nov/2007
End date:
through 30/Nov/2007
30/Nov/2007
OFF
14:00 through 10:00 of the next
day on and after 15/Nov/2007
Select day Start date:
14:00 through 10:00 of the next
20/Nov/2007
days of the specified days of
End date:
the week from 20/Nov/2007
30/Nov/2007
through 30/Nov/2007
Start date:
14:00 through 10:00 of the next
10/Nov/2007
days of the specified days of
End date:
the week from 15/Nov/2007
30/Nov/2007
through 30/Nov/2007
OFF
14:00 through 10:00 of the next
days of the specified days of the
week on and after 15/Nov/2007
Host Selection
âťNormally, you do not need to change this setting.
You can use this setting for changing the host for
Service Settings.
mLifeKitGPSGPS settings
Host selectionHighlight
and press l(
).
pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that
host.
pTo delete a stored host, press i(
), select
âDeleteâ and select âYESâ.
Do the following operations.
Item
Host name
Operation/Explanation
Enter a host name.
pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch
characters.
Host number Enter a host number.
pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch
alphanumeric characters.
GPS Function
Host address Enter a URL.
pYou can enter up to 100 half-pitch
alphanumeric characters.
Press l(
242
).
One Seg
What is One Seg? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
Before Using One Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
Setting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšChannel Settingâş
245
Watching One Seg Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšActivate 1Segâş
247
Using Program Guide i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšProgram Guide i-Îąppliâş
250
Using Data Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšData Broadcastingâş
250
Using TV Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšTVlinkâş
251
Recording a One Seg Program while Watching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252
Booking Programs or Setting Timer Recording of One Seg
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšBook ProgramâşâšTimer Recordingâş
253
Settings for One Seg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .âšUser Settingsâş
256
243
What is One Seg?
One Seg is the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service for
mobile objects, and it broadcasts data as well as video and
audio. Further, by using i-mode, you can obtain the detailed
information, can participate in quiz programs or can have fun
with TV shopping.
For detailed information about the One Seg service, browse to
the web page as follows:
礞ĺŁćłäşş ăă¸ăżăŤćžéć¨é˛ĺäź
(The association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting)
From personal computers
http://www.dpa.or.jp/
From i-mode
http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/
One Seg
â Using One Seg
pThe One Seg broadcasting is a service provided by
television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations).
pThe subscription is not required to receive video, audio and
data broadcasting transmitted on the airwaves for the One
Seg service, and its charge is free.
pThe information displayed in the data broadcasting area contains
âData broadcastingâ and âData broadcasting siteâ. âData
broadcastingâ is displayed on airwaves together with video and
audio, and âData broadcasting siteâ is displayed by connecting
from the information of data broadcasting to the sites provided by
television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). Also, it might be
connected to âi-mode siteâ, etc. When connecting to sites, you
need to subscribe to i-mode separately.
pYou are charged a packet communication fee for browsing
âData broadcasting siteâ and âi-mode siteâ.
You might be charged an information fee for using some
sites (i-mode pay sites).
â Radio waves
The One Seg is one of the broadcasting services receiving
radio waves (broadcasting waves) different from that used for
the FOMA services. Accordingly, you cannot watch the
broadcasting when you are out of reach of the broadcasting
waves, or when the broadcasting is suspended regardless of
whether you are in or out of the FOMA service area.
Even when you are in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting
service area, reception condition might be deteriorated or you
might not be able to receive programs in the following places:
ăťWhere the radio tower that transmits broadcasting waves is
far away
ăťWhere the radio waves are blocked by geographical features
such as mountains or valleys of high-rise buildings
ăťWhere the radio waves are weak or do not reach, such as in
tunnels, underground, or recesses of buildings
To improve reception conditions, fully extend the One Seg
antenna. Also the reception conditions might be improved by
changing the direction of the antenna facing in, moving your
FOMA phone away from or close to you, or moving yourself to
another place.
244
â Message shown in the display when you use One Seg
for the first time
When you use One Seg for the first time after purchase, the
Exemption Clause Confirmation display appears.
).
Press Xo or Vo and then press Oo(
If you select âNOâ from the succeeding confirmation display so
that the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.
pThe Exemption Clause Confirmation display also appears
when you replace the UIM with another one.
â What is broadcasting storage area?
The broadcasting storage area is a storage area inside the
terminal that is exclusive for One Seg. The information you
input according to the instruction on the data broadcasting
program is saved to that broadcasting storage area following
the settings of television entrepreneurs (broadcasting
stations). The information to be saved might contain answers
for quiz, and personal information such as membership
number, gender, age, or occupation.
The saved information might be displayed, or be sent to
television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations) without your
re-input when you browse to the data broadcasting site.
pSee page 257 to erase information in the broadcasting
storage area.
When you replace the UIM with another one, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to reset the
broadcasting storage area. Select âYESâ, and reset it. If you
select âNOâ, the services using the broadcasting storage
area are not available.
â Message on the display when the information in the
broadcasting storage area is read out
When the information in the broadcasting storage area is used
while you are watching a program, the message âUse saved
information? It may include information used by the same
broadcasting groupâ is displayed.
If you select âYESâ, the confirmation display asking whether to
read out the stored information while watching the same
program does not appear after that. Further if you select âYES
(confirm once),â the same confirmation display does not
appear afterward.
Before Using One Seg
How to Watch a One Seg Program
When you watch a One Seg program for the
first time
Channel Setting
Store the channel list for the area you use.
(See page 245)
Activating One Seg
Extend the One Seg antenna, and activate One Seg.
(See page 247)
â One Seg antenna
When you watch a One Seg program, fully extend the One
Seg antenna.
pWhen you change the direction of the One Seg antenna, do
not force it.
Pull the One Seg
antenna out
as far as it goes.
Change the direction
of the One Seg antenna
without applying pressure.
Retract the One Seg antenna by
holding the lower part until it is held back.
â When calls etc. come in while you are watching or
recording a One Seg program
When the events shown below occur while watching or recording
a One Seg program, the video and audio are suspended, and
each function works. Recording is not suspended.
After you finish each function, you can resume watching a One
Seg program. See page 250 for receiving i-mode mail or SMS
messages.
pIncoming voice call
pIncoming video-phone call
pIncoming PushTalk call
pReceiving i-mode mail, SMS, Message R/F
(when âReceiving displayâ is set to âAlarm preferredâ)
pNotification of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book Program
(when âAlarm settingâ is set to âAlarm preferredâ)
pNotification of Timer Recording
(When the start date/time comes, the FOMA phone works
according to the setting of âPriorityâ.)
< Channel Setting>
Setting Channels
To watch One Seg programs, you need to execute
Channel Setting and to select a channel list in advance.
You can store up to 10 channel lists.
pThe broadcasting stations you can receive are different
depending on the local area. If you register a channel list of
the area for travelling or business trip, you can watch
programs in the area just by selecting the channel list.
pThe remote-control numbers you use with channel selections
are previously set for respective broadcasting stations.
pYou cannot execute Channel Setting during recording a One
Seg program.
One Seg
â Battery level
If you try to start One Seg with the battery level low, the battery
alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking
whether to start it. Also, when the battery level becomes low
while you are watching or recording a One Seg program, the
battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display
appears asking whether to end One Seg.
pWhen you do nothing from the confirmation display for about
one minute, One Seg automatically terminates.
pWhile âRec. when low batteryâ is set to âONâ, the confirmation
display does not appear during recording. (See page 256)
pIf the battery level becomes low during recording and recording
ends, the video recorded up to that point is automatically saved.
pDuring Multitask, the battery alert tone sounds but the
confirmation display does not appear. Switch to the Viewer
display and then operate.
Information
pWhen you have not inserted the UIM, when you have
canceled the contract with DoCoMo, or when you have
temporarily suspended using the FOMA service, you cannot
watch One Seg programs.
pEven when you have inserted the UIM contracted with
DoCoMo, you might be disabled to start One Seg if you
repeatedly watch One Seg programs in the condition the
FOMA phone cannot communicate such as when you are
out of the service area. In that case, try to start One Seg in
the condition the FOMA phone can communicate such as
by moving into the FOMA service area.
pWhen you watch a One Seg program for the first time, start
One Seg in the FOMA service area.
pOne Seg is not available while âUSB mode settingâ is set to
âmicroSD modeâ or âMTP modeâ and the FOMA phone is
connected to a personal computer.
pOne Seg might automatically start when you end a call by
closing the FOMA phone during a call. In such a case, be
careful not to use the FOMA phone close to your ear
because audio is played back at the sound volume for One
Seg.
pThe life of battery pack may shorten if you watch One Seg
programs for a long time during charging.
Auto Channel Setting
You can automatically search for the broadcasting
stations that you can currently watch in your area, and
then register them to the channel list.
pPerform the setting with the One Seg antenna extended
within the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area.
m1SegChannel setting
Auto channel settingYES
245
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Searching takes place.
pFrom the Channel List display or Viewer display, press
i(
), select âChannel settingâ, and select âAuto
channel settingâ.
2
YESEnter a title.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch
characters.
pWhen you press Oo(
) without entering a title,
the title name takes the name of âYYYY/MM/DD
hh:mmâ. (Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
pTo cancel searching midway, press l(
) or
r; then select âYESâ. You can register the searched
broadcasting stations in a channel list.
Information
pWhen the multiple broadcasting stations which have the
same remote-control number are retrieved, the message to
the effect that the remote-control number is doubled
appears. Select âOKâ and select your area from the Local
Area Selection display. The channels in the area you select
are preferentially assigned to remote-control numbers 1 to
12, and channels in the area you do not select are assigned
to remote-control numbers 13 onward.
pThe time to search channels requires for about 30 to 60
seconds. However, it differs depending on the number of
broadcasting stations or airwave condition, and 60 seconds
might be exceeded.
Select Channel List
You can select a channel list to set the broadcasting
stations you receive.
Also, you can edit the channel list already registered.
m1SegChannel list
Select a channel list.
Remote-control number
Channel List display
Detailed Channel List
display
The channel list you receive is set, and the detailed
display appears.
pSelect a broadcasting station to watch a One Seg program.
pWhen you select âChannel listâ from the Function menu
of Viewer display, the Viewer display returns by
selecting a channel list.
pYou can watch a One Seg program also by pressing
l(
) from the Channel List display and
selecting a broadcasting station.
Select Area
You can register the broadcasting stations set by
prefecture to a channel list.
One Seg
Function Menu of the Channel List Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
m1SegChannel settingSelect area
Select an areaSelect a prefectureYES
Channel
setting
See page 245.
pFrom the Channel List display or Viewer display, press
i(
), select âChannel settingâ, and select
âSelect areaâ.
Edit title
Enter a title.
You can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch
characters.
Delete this
YES
pYou cannot delete the channel list currently set.
Information
pDepending on the area, you may not be able to correctly
register the broadcasting stations by âSelect areaâ. In that
case, search for the broadcasting stations by âAuto channel
setting.â
Function Menu of the Detailed Channel List Display
Function menu
Remote
control No.
Operation/Explanation
You can change the broadcasting station set
for the remote-control number.
Select a broadcasting station you want
to changeSelect the remote-control
number to be set.
pIf any broadcasting station has already been
set for the specified remote-control number,
the broadcasting stations switch positions.
Repeat the operation to set a broadcasting
station for a remote-control number.
l(
Delete this
246
)YES
YES
pWhen you delete all the broadcasting stations in
the channel list, the channel list itself is deleted.
pYou cannot delete the broadcasting station
in the channel list currently set.
< Activate 1Seg>
Watching One Seg Programs
Just change the style to automatically switch between
the vertical display and horizontal display when you are
watching.
pWhen you use One Seg for the first time, the Exemption
Clause Confirmation display appears. (See page 244)
pYou can start One Seg also by using the channel information
displayed in the Program Guide i-Îąppli, sites, or mail.
pYou can play back the audio from One Seg programs via a
commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 352)
Press and hold c for at least one second.
One Seg starts from the channel
you watched last time. â
â is
displayed while watching a One
Seg program.
pWhen you have not registered
any channel list, the confirmation
display appears. Select âOKâ
and execute Channel Setting.
(See page 245)
pYou can start One Seg also by
Viewer display
switching to Horizontal Open
Style while the display for selecting One Seg function is
displayed in Normal Style.
pWhile âWork with styleâ is set to â1Segâ, you can start
One Seg also by switching to Horizontal Open Style
from the Stand-by display.
pTo end watching, press h and select âYESâ.
(Strong)
(Weak)
â
â appears out of the broadcasting area.
Reception of Caption
â
â is displayed while caption information is being recorded.
Sound Volume
Program Information (outline)
The program name is displayed in the vertical display.
The channel, start/end time, and program name are
displayed in the horizontal display.
This is displayed when you operate keys or switch styles.
Record video
â
â appears during recording video.
â
â appears during recording video by Timer Recording.
Icon/Caption
Icon: ON/OFF of âIconâ
Caption: ON/OFF of Caption
This is displayed when you operate keys or switch styles.
pAfter you select a channel using Channel Search, the
channel (remote-control number) might not be displayed.
pWhile âIconâ is set to âOFFâ in the horizontal display, the guide
display appears when you operate keys or switch styles.
â Channel switching operation (in Video Mode only)
Operation
Key operation
Direct channel
selection
Remote control No.1~9 . . . 1~9
Remote control No.10 . . . . a
Remote control No.11 . . . . 0
Remote control No.12 . . . . s
One Seg
â About Viewer display
(When âSwitch displayâ is âV. img+Caption+DBCâ.)
Video
Caption
Data Broadcasting
Operation Mode
Video Mode:
Operates the video or audio. (See page 247)
Data Broadcasting Mode:
Operates the data broadcasting. (See page 250)
ECO Mode
â
â appears during ECO Mode.
Channel (remote-control number)
Airwave Reception Level (estimate)
Sequential
No
channel selection
Channel search
Vertical display
No(for at least one second)
pEach time of pressing switches
channels by searching receivable
broadcasting stations in order of
frequency.
pl(
) or r to suspend
Guide display
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Horizontal display
247
â Operations while watching a One Seg program
Operation
Key operation
Sound volume
adjustment
Boâť1 or <>
pPress and hold to adjust the sound
volume sequentially.
pAvailable for setting to from Level 0
(Silent) through 25
Mute
râť1
prâť1 or adjust volume to play back
soundâť2
Start program
guide i-Îąppli
l(
Program info
l(for at least one second)âť2
Program info (outline) m(
)âť2
Switch display
m(
) while displaying program
information (outline)
pEach time of pressing switches ON/OFF of
âIconâ and âCaptionâ in the horizontal display.
Vertical/
Horizontal
display
c(
)âť1âť2âť3
pEach time of pressing switches the
display direction.
Record video
Oo(
pOo(
)âť1 or p(for at least one second)
)âť1 or p to stop
Record still image p
One Seg
Switch TV/data BC dâť2
pEach time of pressing switches between
Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode.
âť1 In Data Broadcasting Mode, you cannot operate.
âť2 You cannot operate in Horizontal Open Style.
âť3 When you close the FOMA phone, the vertical display
returns. In Horizontal Open Style, the horizontal display
automatically appears; the vertical display does not appear.
Information
pEven when you switch the display by using Multitask while
you are watching a One Seg program, the audio from the
One Seg program is played back. (Play Background) The
audio might not be played back, however, depending on the
function or program. (See page 419)
pWhen âTV sound while closedâ is set to âONâ, the audio is
played back even if you close the FOMA phone while you are
watching a One Seg program. You cannot do anything other
than adjusting the volume when your FOMA phone is closed.
pThe following might occur depending on the radio wave conditions:
ăťThe audio is interrupted.
ăťThe data broadcasting is not operable.
ăťBlock-shaped noise appears on the display or playing stops.
ăťThe video or the data broadcasting is not displayed. (A dark
screen appears.)
pThe caption might not be displayed depending on the program.
pThe data broadcasting cannot be displayed in the horizontal display.
pIf you move, the receivable airwaves or broadcasting
stations might change being affected by mountains or
buildings. If reception on One Seg goes bad after moving,
perform âAuto channel settingâ; then reception might be
improved via different airwaves or you might be able to
watch programs of other broadcasting stations.
248
Information
pIf you use Channel Search to select a channel after you
move, etc,. you might be able to find the channel you could
not register by âAuto channel settingâ. Execute âAdd to ch.
listâ to register the channel you found, and then you can
watch the channel from the next time.
pWhen starting One Seg or switching channels, it takes a
while before you can watch a One Seg program.
Function Menu of Viewer display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Channel info You can display the detailed display of the
selected channel list. Select a broadcasting
station to switch to it.
Program info You can display information of the program
you are watching.
pWhen you have not obtained program
information, it is not displayed.
Channel list Go to step 1 of âSelect Channel Listâ on page 246.
Channel setting See page 245.
Add to ch. list You can add the broadcasting station you are
currently watching to the channel list.
YES
pThe broadcasting station is registered to the
lowest number of an unoccupied
remote-control number from 13 onward.
Program guide See page 250.
Switch display You can switch the contents of the Viewer
display.
At One Seg
start-up
Select an item.
When âCaptionâ pIf you set to âEnlarged V. img+DBCâ, the
is set to âONâ:
video in the vertical display is enlarged.
V. img+Caption
However, the sides of the video might be cut
+DBC
depending on the program.
When âCaptionâ
is set to âOFFâ: pEven if you set to âData broadcastingâ, the
Visual
audio from One Seg program is played
image+DBC
back.
Switch TV/
You can switch between Video Mode and
data BC
Data Broadcasting Mode while watching a
At One Seg
One Seg program in the vertical display.
start-up
Video Mode
Icon
See page 257.
Compose
message
See page 249.
Function menu
Settings
(Brightness)
Operation/Explanation
You can set the brightness of the display light
to Level 1 (dark) through 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pIf you set to âAuto settingâ, it is adjusted
automatically accordance with the ambient
brightness.
pThe setting here is valid until you finish
watching the One Seg program. The setting
at One Seg start-up follows the setting
specified by âBrightnessâ of âBacklightâ
on page 107.
Settings
See page 256.
(Image quality)
Settings
(LCD AI)
See page 107.
Settings
See page 256.
(Auto volume)
Settings
(Remaster)
See page 256.
Settings
(Listening)
See page 256.
Settings
(Equalizer)
See page 256.
Settings
(Main/sub
sound)
SoundMain/sub sound
Main sound, Sub sound, or
Main+sub sound
Settings
SoundSwitch audio data
(Switch audio Sound 1 or Sound 2
pYou can switch only when audio that can be
data)
switched is found.
Settings
See page 256.
(TV sound w/
closed)
Settings
(ECO mode)
See page 257.
Data
broadcasting
(Reload
contents)
You can reload the data broadcasting site
being displayed.
Reload contents
pThe confirmation display appears asking
whether to re-send the data you entered,
depending on the site.
Operation/Explanation
Data
See page 257.
broadcasting
(Sound effect)
Data
See page 257.
broadcasting
(Reset settings)
Back to data
BC
You can stop browsing the data broadcasting
site and return to the data broadcasting.
Tune service You can select a program to watch when the
same broadcasting station is broadcasting
multiple services (programs).
Select a channel.
TVlink list
You can display the TVlink List. (See page 251)
AV output
See page 313.
Send i-mode Mail while Watching
You can compose and send i-mode mail messages
while you are watching a One Seg program. (Multiple
Windows)
When you send an i-mode mail message to the FOMA
phone supporting the âMedia Toâ function by âRecom.
channel mailâ, the receiving end can start One Seg by
using the âMedia Toâ function.
pYou cannot operate One Seg while the Message
Composition display is shown. You cannot display the
caption and data broadcasting, either.
pWhen you switch to Horizontal Open Style while the
Message Composition display is shown, the Viewer display
only is displayed horizontally.
pYou can compose SMS messages while watching a One Seg program.
Viewer displayi(
Compose messageCompose message
or Recom. channel mail
One Seg
At One Seg
start-up
Main sound
Function menu
Message Composition display
Viewer display
Data
See page 164.
broadcasting
(Set image
display)
Information
pEven when you show the Message Composition display/
detailed Sent Mail display by Multitask while you are watching
a One Seg program, the display appears in multiple windows.
249
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Data
See page 155.
broadcasting
(Certificate)
Compose message. . . . . You can compose a new
i-mode mail message. Go to
step 2 on page 172.
Recom. channel mail . . . You can compose an i-mode
mail message whose text
contains the information of the
channel you are watching. Go
to step 2 on page 172.
Information
pOnly the audio is played back from a One Seg program
without showing the Viewer display if you select âMail
historyâ from the Function menu of the Inbox/Outbox/Draft
List or a detailed mail display by Multitask while watching a
One Seg program and show the detailed Sent Mail display of
a mail message sent to a person whose mail address is not
stored in the Phonebook.
Information
pWhen â
â appears at the lower left of the display, switch
to Horizontal Open Style or do something to switch to
Viewer display and then operate.
pWhen â
â appears at the lower left of the display, switch
to Horizontal Open Style or do something to switch to the
Viewer display and then operate.
By using the Program Guide i-Îąppli, you can start One
Seg by selecting a program from the program guide,
book programs, and set timer recordings. (See page 219)
pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose/send i-mode mail
message. (See page 372)
< Program Guide i-Îąppli>
Using Program Guide i-Îąppli
Receive i-mode Mail while Watching
When an i-mode mail message comes in from the
person whose mail address is stored in the Phonebook,
you can open the detailed Received Mail display while
you are watching a One Seg program. (Multiple
Windows)
pYou cannot operate One Seg while the detailed Received
Mail display is shown. You cannot display the caption and
data broadcasting, either.
pWhen you switch to Horizontal Open Style while the detailed
Received Mail display is shown, the Viewer display only is
displayed horizontally.
pYou can display SMS messages while watching a One Seg
program.
Receive i-mode mail while Viewer display is
shownReception Result displayMail
Select an i-mode mail message to be
displayedOK
One Seg
m1SegProgram guide
GăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List Remotecontroller) starts.
pPress l(
) from the
display of the GăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞ
ă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List
Remote-controller) to watch the
program currently broadcast on
the selected channel.
pFor details, refer to âMobile
Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
Information
pYou can set the Program Guide i-Îąppli by âProgram guide
keyâ of âSoftware settingâ.
pWhen you use the GăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide
Program List Remote-controller) for the first time, you need
to do initial settings.
pGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List Remotecontroller) is a mail-linked i-Îąppli program, so you cannot
use it in B Mode of 2in1.
< Data Broadcasting>
Detailed Received Mail display
Viewer display
Using Data Broadcasting
One Seg enables you to use the data broadcasting in
addition to the video and audio. Various information
including still/moving images is available from the site
linked with TV programs.
Viewer display (Video Mode)d
Select an item (link).
Information
pEven when you show the detailed Received Mail display by
Multitask while you are watching a One Seg program, the
display appears in multiple windows.
pYou cannot show the Viewer display and only the audio
from a One Seg program is played back when you display a
mail message from a person whose mail address is not
stored in the Phonebook.
pWhen the display appears in multiple windows, or when only
audio from a One Seg program is played back with the
detailed Received Mail display shown, you cannot press +No
to show other messages. However, you can press +No to
show other messages when you select âMail historyâ from the
Function menu of the Inbox/Outbox/Draft List or the detailed
mail display by Multitask while watching a One Seg program.
250
Video Mode switches to Data
Broadcasting Mode and â
â
appears.
pAudio from a One Seg program
is played back even during Data
Broadcasting Mode.
pYou can display only data
broadcasting when you press
i(
) from the Viewer
display and select âData
broadcastingâ of âSwitch displayâ.
pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to
connect to i-mode depending on the data broadcasting
and data broadcasting site.
pSee page 153 for the operation while a site is displayed.
Information
pEach time you press -d, Video Mode and Data
Broadcasting Mode are switched.
pIf you change a channel during Data Broadcasting Mode,
Video Mode returns.
pYou cannot display the data broadcasting in the horizontal
display.
pYou cannot enter pictographs when you enter characters on
data broadcasting or data broadcasting site.
pThe audio might be played back depending on the program
while the i-mode site is displayed. The One Seg video does
not appear, however.
pWhen you display the data broadcasting or data
broadcasting site, a tone might be output depending on the
program. In that case, the playback of the One Seg audio
temporarily stops, and the tone of the data broadcasting is
preferentially output.
< TVlink>
Using TV Links
Some data broadcasting programs might contain TV
links which lead to the details of the programs or
related information site. From the TV links, you can
store the site address information in the TVlink List and
can easily call them up for browsing later.
Register to TV Links
When you select the item (link) that can be registered to
the TVlink List, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to register it to the TVlink List.
You can register up to 50 TV links.
pWhile the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site is
displayed, the confirmation display might appear asking
whether to send the contents you entered on the site or
whether to permit obtaining mobile phone information.
Use Highlighted Information for
Various Operations
You can use the highlighted information in the data
broadcasting site to easily use the functions such as
making calls, or sending mail.
Select an item (link) and use the Phone To/AV Phone To
or Mail To function. (See page 163)
Information
pDepending on the data broadcasting or data broadcasting
site, the function of composing i-mode mail or storing the
Phonebook entries might be automatically used. The
confirmation display asking whether to use each function
appears.
pWhen you try to register the same URL or memo
information, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to overwrite it.
pWhen the maximum number of TV links has already
been registered to the TVlink List, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to register after
deleting.
Information
pValidity period is set for some links. If the validity period is
expired, you cannot register it.
pThe number of characters that can be registered for a URL
is up to 60 half-pitch characters. When the number of
characters used for a URL exceeds that, you cannot
register it.
pYou can register a title of up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch
characters. When the number of characters exceeds that,
the excess is deleted. When the title is not found, the URL is
displayed in the List display.
pThe contents you entered in the site is not registered to the
TVlink.
Bring Up a Registered TV Link
m1SegTVlink
Select a TV link to be displayed.
pWhen the confirmation display
appears asking whether to
connect to i-mode, select âYESâ.
TVlink List
pFor a link whose validity period is
expired, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to delete it.
pAfter you brought up a site using a TV link, the TV link is
displayed at the top of the TVlink List next time.
251
One Seg
pWhen you select âYES (confirm once)â from the
confirmation display for data broadcasting, the information
on data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and
you might be charged a packet communication fee. (See
page 257)
pIf you move in the place while watching a One Seg program,
where the airwave is unstable, the video and data
broadcasting may be automatically updated. In that case,
the top page of the data broadcasting appears, and the
information you have entered into the connected data
broadcasting is cleared. Ensure that you watch the data
broadcasting in a place where the airwave is stable.
In Data Broadcasting Mode, select an item
(link) that can be registered to the TVlink
ListYES
â Icons in the TVlink List
Icon
Format
Description
Memo information
Displays memo information.
Link communication
contents
Connects to the data
broadcasting site. (Video and
caption are not displayed.)
i-mode contents
Connects to the i-mode site.
Function Menu of the TVlink List
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Display detail Displays the title, URL, outline, content type,
and validity period of the TV link.
No. of TVlink Displays the number of the registered TV
links.
Delete this
YES
Delete
selected
Put a check mark for TV links to be
)YES
deletedl(
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
One Seg
Recording a One Seg Program
while Watching
You can save the program as video or still images while
you are watching.
pThe copy control signals such as âCopy neverâ, âCopy onceâ,
and âCopy freeâ are incorporated into One Seg. The copy
control signals are determined by each broadcasting station.
pYou cannot record the programs of âCopy neverâ. Further,
when the copy control signal is changed to âCopy neverâ
during recording, the recording session is closed, and the
video recorded up to that point is saved.
Record Video
The recorded video is saved to the microSD memory
card (âData boxâââ1SegâââVideoâââmicroSDâ). You
can record up to 2 Gbytes per item.
pSee page 286 for playing back the recorded video.
pYou cannot save the recorded video to the FOMA phone.
Viewer displayp(for at least one second)
The confirmation tone sounds, â
â appears, and
recording starts.
pYou can start recording also by pressing o
) in
Video Mode.
pWhen the radio wave reception level indicates â
â,
you cannot record video. Even if â
â is indicated, you
might not be able to record it depending on the radio
wave conditions.
pYou cannot change the channel during recording.
252
Press p.
The confirmation tone sounds and recording ends, and
video is saved.
pYou can save the video also by pressing o
) in
Video Mode.
pWhen the file size is larger than 2 Gbytes, or the
storage location becomes full, the recording
automatically ends, and then the video recorded up to
that point is saved.
â Estimate of the number of saved files and recordable
time
The maximum savable number
99
The maximum recordable time (total)
Approx. 740 minutes
pThe savable number of video files decreases depending on
the data volume.
pThe maximum recordable time is an estimate for microSD
memory card of 2 Gbytes, and it is an estimate for 224 kbps
of video, 48 kbps of audio, and 52 kbps of data (including
captions). The recordable time varies depending on the
broadcasting station or program.
Information
pThe playing time of the saved data might become shorter
than the recording time depending on the radio wave
conditions.
pThe recording is not suspended even when you switch
displays by Multitask or when a call comes in during
recording.
pWhen the radio wave conditions are changed to indicate
â
â during recording, recording continues but video and
audio during that period are not saved.
pIf you remove the battery pack or pull out the microSD
memory card during recording, the recorded data is saved
as the file that cannot be played back.
pDepending on the broadcasting station or program, video
and audio might be saved a few seconds after your
recording operation.
pYou cannot record when the video storage area is full. Also,
you might not be able to record when the unused space in
the storage area is not enough. Delete unnecessary video
files and try again.
pThe file name and title name of the saved video are as follows:
File name: âPRGXXXâ
Title name: âYYYY/MM/DD hh:mmâ
(X: numerals, Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
pYou cannot set the recorded video for the Stand-by display,
ring tone or Call Receiving display.
pData broadcasting cannot be saved as video.
pYou cannot save video during AV output.
Item
Record Still Images
The recorded still images are saved to your FOMA
phone (âData boxâââ1SegâââImageâ folder). You can
save up to 3,500 files in total including other data files,
however, the number of files you can save decreases
depending on the data volume. (See page 444)
pSee page 274 for displaying the recorded still image files.
pYou cannot save still images to the microSD memory card.
(Edit title)
(Repeat)
Viewer displayp
A confirmation tone sounds, and the still image is saved.
pWhen the airwave reception level indicates â
â, you
cannot record still images.
(Alarm)
Information
pThe file name and title name of the saved still image are as
follows:
File name: âYYYYMMDDhhmmXXXXâ
Title name: âYYYY/MM/DD hh:mmâ
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, X: numeral)
pYou cannot set the recorded still image for the Stand-by
display or the Call Receiving display.
pSee page 162 for when images are stored to the maximum.
pData broadcasting and caption cannot be saved as still images.
pYou cannot record still images during AV output.
(Alarm tone)
(Volume)
< Book Program>< Timer Recording>
Booking Programs or Setting
Timer Recording of One Seg
You can book programs by setting the date/time,
channel, and program name. You can book up to 100
programs.
m1SegBook programl(
Do the following operations.
pSelect a booked program to check the contents, and
you can edit it by pressing l(
).
Item
(Start date
setting)
Operation/Explanation
Enter a date/time for starting watching.
Select an item.
Enter date . . . . Enter a date/time directly.
Choose date . . Select a date from the
Calendar and enter a time.
Select how many seconds (minutes)
before the specified time to be alerted.
Select a type of alarm tone
Select a folderSelect an alarm tone.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pIf you set to âStepâ, the alarm tone is silent
for about three seconds, and then the
volume steps up every about three seconds,
from Level 1 through Level 6.
If you set to âONâ, you can start One Seg
directly from the Booking Alarm Notification
display.
ON or OFF
Press l(
).
You can set timer recordings by setting the date/time,
channel, and program name. You can set up to 100
timer recordings.
m1SegTimer recording
l(
)Do the following operations.
pSelect a set timer recording to check the contents, and
).
you can edit it by pressing l(
pYou can display the used memory space (estimate) by
).
pressing i(
Item
(Start date
setting)
(End date
setting)
Operation/Explanation
Enter a date/time for starting or ending
recording. The booking alarm notification is
made about one minute before the starting time.
Select an item.
Enter date . . . . . Enter a date/time directly.
Choose date . . . Select a date from the
Calendar and enter a time.
253
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
Select a channel.
(Channel)
Select a type of repeat.
pIf you select â1timeâ, the booking is not repeated.
pIf you select âSelect dayâ, put a check mark
for days of the week to be set and press
l(
).
pThe program booking set with repetition is
counted as one booking.
Select an alarm method.
ON . . . . . . . . . .Alerts you at the time set for
the start date/time comes.
The setting for alarm
notification is completed.
ON/Set time. . .Alerts you at the time set as
the prenotification.
OFF. . . . . . . . . .Does not alert. The setting for
alarm notification is completed.
Timer Recording
Book Program
(Activate TV
w/ alarm)
Enter a program name.
pYou can enter up to 48 full-pitch/96
half-pitch characters.
One Seg
You can book programs or set timer recordings of One
Seg. At the specified date/time, an alarm sounds to
notify you of the start of the program.
pYou can book programs or set timer recordings also by using
the channel information displayed in the Program Guide
i-Îąppli, sites, or mail.
Operation/Explanation
Item
Operation/Explanation
Select a channel.
(Channel)
(Edit title)
(Repeat)
(Alarm)
(Volume)
One Seg
(Priority)
Enter a program name.
pYou can enter up to 48 full-pitch/96
half-pitch characters.
Select a type of repeat.
pIf you select â1 timeâ, the recording is not
repeated.
pIf you select âSelect dayâ, put a check mark
for days of the week to be set and press
l(
).
pThe timer recording set with repetition is
counted as one event.
You can set whether to make the alarm tone
for the booking alarm notification.
ON or OFF
pRegardless of the setting of âAlarmâ, the
vibrator works in Manner Mode.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pYou cannot set the volume to âStepâ.
You can set a recording operation for when
the start time data/time arrives while
operating a function which cannot be started
up simultaneously.
Recording or Operation
Recording
. . . Suspends and terminates the function
being operated, and starts recording.
Operation
. . . The confirmation display appears asking
whether to start recording. Select âYESâ
to suspend and terminate the function
being operated and start recording.
pFor while operating a function which can be
started up simultaneously, recording starts
by the Multitask function.
pWhen the start time arrives during a call
(including dialing and ringing), recording
starts after you end the call. When you are
using another function during a call, recording
starts after you end the call and the function.
Press l(
).
pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether
to set the timer recording, select âYESâ. If you select
âYES (confirm once)â, the same confirmation display
does not appear afterward.
Information
pYou can book programs or set timer recordings also by
using the program information displayed in the Program
Guide i-Îąppli, sites, or mail. In that case, the registration
display might appear with the start date/time, end date/time,
channel, and program name entered.
254
Information
pWhen you booked multiple programs whose booking alarm
notification is made at the same date/time, the notification
for the program set for the earliest start date/time is
preferentially made. When the start date/time of the
programs is the same, the notification set for the program
booked in the last is preferentially made.
pYou cannot set multiple timer recordings whose recording time
overlaps. If you book two timer recordings and the recording end
time of one program is the same as the recording start time of the
other, recording of the first program ends about one minute earlier.
pYou cannot book programs or set timer recordings of which
starting date/time or alarm notification date/time (for Timer
Recording, about one minute before) is over.
pThe program bookings and timer recordings of which alarm
notification date/time is over are automatically deleted.
However, the bookings set to be repeated, program bookings
for which âAlarmâ is set to âOFFâ are not deleted. Also the
bookings are not deleted if you were operating the program
booking/timer recording function on the notification date/time.
pWhen no channel lists are set, you cannot book programs
and set timer recordings.
pWhen you have set âPriorityâ of âRecordingâ to âOperationâ
and the confirmation display is shown, the recording does
not start even at the recording start time and starts at the
time you select âYESâ. However, the recording is not
executed if the recording end time is over.
pThe title of the recorded video file takes the program name
booked for the timer recording.
pâ
â appears in the Viewer display during recording
video by Timer Recording.
pThe audio from a One Seg program is not played back
during recording that has been started by Timer Recording.
You can play back the audio by pressing -r or adjusting
the sound volume, however.
Function Menu while Book Program or Timer
Recording is Displayed
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
New
Go to step 1 of âBook Programâ on page 253
for Book Program.
Go to step 1 of âTimer Recordingâ on
page 253 for Timer Recording.
Edit
Go to step 1 of âBook Programâ on page 253
for Book Program.
Go to step 1 of âTimer Recordingâ on
page 253 for Timer Recording.
Sort
You can change the display order.
Select an order.
Delete this
YES
Delete past
You can delete the program bookings and
timer recordings whose start date/time or end
date/time is set for the past date/time.
YES
Delete
Put a check mark for programbookings
selected
or timer recordings to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Memory info You can display the used memory space
(estimate).
[Timer
Recording only]
â When you set an alarm for âBook programâ or âTimer
recordingâ
The icon appears on the desktop.
â â . . . . . .Displayed when an alarm is set for today
(except the setting for past time).
â â . . . . . .Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow
or onward only.
pIf you set âDisplay settingâââClockâââClock displayâ to
âOFFâ, or set âAlarmâ to âOFFâ for a program booking, the
icons are not displayed.
â When the time specified for âBook programâ or
âTimer recordingâ comes
The alarm sounds for about five minutes, and illumination
lights. The vibrator works as you set for âPhoneâ of
âVibratorâ. The set start date/time, channel, program name
and an animation appear on the display.
About one minute before starting time, the alarm sounds for
about two seconds, and illumination lights. The vibrator works
as you set for âPhoneâ of âVibratorâ. The set start date/time,
end date/time, channel, program name and an animation
appear on the display, then the Viewer display appears.
pDuring a call
The alarm sounds from the earpiece.
pWhen the booking alarm notification for a program booking
or timer recording is set to the same time of âAlarmâ,
âToDoâ, or âScheduleâ, the notification is made in the
priority order of âAlarmâ â âTimer recordingâ â âToDoââ
âScheduleâ â âBook programâ.
A missed program booking or timer recording is notified by
the icon on the desktop.
pWhen the power is turned off
The booking alarm notification is not made. For Timer
Recording, you cannot record a One Seg program unless
the power has been set to âONâ one minute before the start
date/time.
The icon does not appear on the desktop even after turning
on the power.
pWhile updating software program
The booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot
record a One Seg program unless software update is
finished one minute before the start date/time.
When the specified time comes during updating software
program, the icon does not appear on the desktop even
after updating is completed.
Information
pWhen you book programs or timer recordings with âAlarm
settingâ set to âAlarm preferredâ, and the booking alarm
time arrives while you are dialing, the alarm sounds after
you have called up the other party. When booking alarm
time arrives during ringing, the alarm sounds after
communication has started.
pYou might not be able to set some Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music
files for an alarm for a program booking.
pWhen a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file is set for an alarm for a
program booking, only the audio is played back at the
specified time. The illumination for when you play back a
demo to select an alarm tone differs from for when you
are notified by an alarm.
â To clear alarm tone/booking alarm message, and
animation for Book Program
The alarm tone stops by pressing any of the keys, but the
animation becomes a still image, and the booking alarm
message stays displayed. When âActivate TV w/ alarmâ is
set to âOFFâ, press any key again to clear. However, you
cannot clear the booking alarm message by pressing a side
key, with the FOMA phone closed. When a call comes in, the
alarm stops.
â When âActivate TV w/ alarmâ of Book Program is set
to âONâ
Press Oo(
) and select âYESâ from the Booking
Alarm Notification display; then One Seg starts, and you can
watch the booked program.
If you start watching the booked program during recording,
the video recorded up to that point is automatically saved;
then the booked program appears.
ᾥáśáśáśáśáśáśáśáś
pIn Manner Mode
The vibrator, message display, and illumination light notify
you. The alarm sounds at the volume set for Manner Mode.
(See page 103)
pDuring infrared data exchange, during iC communication, or
while SD-PIM is operated, the booking alarm notification is
not made. You cannot record a One Seg program unless
each function is finished one minute before the start date/
time.
After each function is finished, the icon appears on the
desktop to inform you.
One Seg
pDuring operations
When âAlarm settingâ is set to âOperation preferred,â the
booking alarm notification is made only when the Stand-by
display is shown. When it is set to âAlarm preferredâ, the
booking alarm notification is made even while you are
operating another function or during a call. (See page 341)
Timer Recording works according to the setting of âPriorityâ
(see page 254). However, Timer Recording might not work
when you are reading to/writing from the microSD memory
card, or accessing the Data Storage Center.
pDuring Lock All, Personal Data Lock or Omakase Lock
The booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot
record a One Seg program unless each lock is released
one minute before the start date/time.
After releasing each lock, the icon appears on the desktop
to inform you.
255
â When âBooking Alarm Notificationâ is not executed or
recording is completed
The icon appears on the desktop. You can check that icon
for the contents of the missed booking alarm (booking
information) or recording result.
The booking information or recording result is the latest
missed one.
pWhen âActivate TV w/ alarmâ is set to âONâ, you can start
One Seg also by pressing Oo(
) from the display of
booking Information.
pWhen recorded video is stored, you can play back the
) from the display of
video also by pressing Oo(
recording result.
Item
Sound
You can set whether to turn up the sound
(Auto volume) volume so that it will be more audible.
Sound effectAuto volume
ON or OFF
Sound
(Remaster)
You can bring the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device to the original sound by
complementing high-pitch range lost at data
compression.
Sound effectRemasterON or OFF
Sound
(Listening)
You can set sound effect for listening.
Sound effectListening
Select an item.
Surround . . . .Makes the sound natural and
stereophonic.
Natur 1/2 . . . .Complements the cooped-up
feeling specific to earphones
and plays back natural sound.
Select 1 or 2 according to your
taste.
OFF . . . . . . . .Sets Listening to âOFFâ.
pâNatur 1/2â is effective for the sound from an
earphone or Bluetooth device.
Sound
(Equalizer)
You can change the quality of sound from an
earphone or Bluetooth device.
Sound effectEqualizer
Select an item.
Normal . . . . . Reproduces normal sound
quality.
Dynamic . . . Makes the sound dynamic by
accentuation.
Voice . . . . . . Makes conversation audible.
Train. . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that
causes sound leakage.
Recording Result
You can display up to 20 recording results from the
latest one.
m1SegRecording result
Select a recording result.
pTo delete all recording results,
), enter your
press i(
Terminal Security Code, and
select âYESâ.
< User Settings>
Settings for One Seg
One Seg
m1SegUser settings
Do the following operations.
Item
Operation/Explanation
Caption
You can set whether to display the caption for
when watching starts.
ON or OFF
Rec. when
low battery
You can set whether to continue recording
when the battery runs short during recording.
ON or OFF
ON . . . . .The confirmation display does not
appear and recording continues.
OFF . . . .The confirmation display appears
asking whether to end recording.
Image quality You can change the image quality.
Select an item.
Standard . . . The average image quality
Sports . . . . . The image quality suitable for
sports programs
Cinema . . . . The image quality suitable for
movies
Dynamic . . . The dynamic image quality by
accentuation
256
Operation/Explanation
Sound
You can set whether to continue outputting
(TV sound
audio for when you close the FOMA phone
while closed) while watching a One Seg program.
TV sound while closedON or OFF
pWhen the setting is âOFFâ, audio is silenced
when you close the FOMA phone. Audio is
played back again when you open the
FOMA phone and select âOKâ.
Item
ECO mode
Display light
Operation/Explanation
You can set ECO Mode which fixes some
settings and reduces the battery consumption.
YES
pTo release ECO Mode, perform the same
operation.
pOnce ECO Mode is set, the following settings
are fixed and cannot be changed. However, if
you release ECO Mode, settings return.
Image quality: Standard
Remaster: OFF
Listening: OFF
Equalizer: Normal
You can set the period of time of the display lights
while you are watching a One Seg program.
Constant light or Lighting duration
Enter a lighting duration (minutes).
pEnter from â01â through â30â in two digits.
Data
You can set whether to display images of the
broadcasting data broadcasting site. (See page 164)
(Set image
display)
You can set whether to sound an effect tone
of the data broadcasting and the data
broadcasting site.
Sound effect settingON or OFF
Data
broadcasting
(Reset
settings)
If you select âYES (confirm once)â from the
confirmation display for data broadcasting,
the same confirmation display does not
appear afterward. The confirmation display
resumes after you reset settings.
Reset settingsYES
Icon
You can set whether to always display guide
(see page 247) in the horizontal display.
ON or OFF
pEven if you set âIconâ to âOFFâ and
âReceiving displayâ to âOperation preferredâ,
the icon such as â â, â â or â â appears
when you receive a mail message or
Message R/F.
Check TV
settings
You can check each of âUser settingsâ.
Reset TV
settings
Operation/Explanation
You can reset each of âUser settingsâ to the
default.
See âFunction Listâ for the items to be reset.
(See page 394)
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pWhen âTV sound while closedâ is set to âONâ, the
information about the data broadcasting might be
automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet
communication fee.
pRegardless of the setting of this function, the audio is played
back even if your FOMA phone is closed when you switch
displays by Multitask, or when the display appears in
multiple windows.
pAV output is not available during ECO Mode.
pWhen you switch to the horizontal display from the vertical
display in ECO Mode, the information about the data
broadcasting is discarded. Switch to the vertical display to
receive the data broadcasting again.
pIf you change this setting, âSet image displayâ of âi-mode
settingsâ is also changed.
pYou cannot reset the confirmation display at the start of
One Seg (see page 244) and at the time of Timer Recording
(see page 254).
pThe guide display might appear even if âIconâ is set to âOFFâ
when the radio wave conditions have got worse.
Reset channel You can delete all channel lists.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
setting
Reset storage i(
)Delete this or Delete all
area
Delete this. . . Deletes only the information of
the affiliated broadcasting
stations you selected, from the
broadcasting storage area.
Delete all . . . . Deletes the information of all
affiliated broadcasting stations
created in the broadcasting
storage area.
YES
pIf you select âDelete allâ, you need to enter
your Terminal Security Code.
257
One Seg
Data
broadcasting
(Sound effect
setting)
Item
258
Full Browser/PC Movie
Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšFull Browserâş
260
Setting Full Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšFull Browser Settingsâş
263
What is PC Movie? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
Downloading PC Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
Playing Back PC Movies from Data Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . âšPC Movie Playerâş
266
259
pWhen âAccess settingâ is set to âNoâ, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to start Full Browser.
Highlight âYesâ and select âOKâ to switch setting of
âAccess settingâ, then Full Browser starts up.
pTo end Full Browser, press h with an Internet web
page displayed and select âYESâ.
pWhen no Home URL is stored and you select âHomeâ,
the message appears telling that no Home URL is
stored. Select âOKâ, then the Home URL Storage
display appears. (See page 263)
< Full Browser>
Full Browser/PC Movie
Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC
You can browse Internet web pages designed for PCs
using the Full Browser function. You can display even
the Internet web pages that cannot be correctly
displayed by i-mode. However, you cannot display or
correctly display some Internet web pages.
If you change the style while using Full Browser, the
display automatically switches between the vertical
display and the horizontal display. However, the
display might not switch automatically during data
communication or while a message is shown. When
you switch it manually, select âCHG wide scr. modeâ
from the Function menu.
pThe data such as Home URL or Bookmarks registered via
Full Browser cannot be used via i-mode. The contents set by
Full Browser are invalid for i-mode, either.
pNote that you are charged a high communication fee for the
massive data communication such as browsing Internet web
pages having many images or downloading data files. For
details on the packet communication fee, refer to âMobile
Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode]â.
pYou can browse Internet web pages composed of frames.
You can select a frame to display it as well. (See page 261)
pYou can display SSL/TLSâť-compatible pages via Full
Browser.
âťSSL and TLS are the methods of safer data
communication using authentication/encryption
technology to protect your privacy. SSL/TLS pages
prevent eavesdropping and information alteration during
communication by exchanging encrypted data files.
Further, server authentication prevents web spoofing, thus
making your personal information such as credit card
number or postal address exchanged safer.
iFull BrowserSelect an item.
Home . . . . . . . . . .Displays an Internet web page set as
Home URL.
Bookmark . . . . . .Displays an Internet web page stored
in Bookmark. (See page 157)
Last URL . . . . . . .Displays an Internet web page you
viewed last time.
Go to location . . .Displays an Internet web page by
entering a URL. (See âDisplaying
Internet Web Pagesâ on page 156)
Full Browser settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Configures Full Browser settings.
(See page 263)
260
Information
pIt may take long to display some Internet web pages.
pYou cannot use the following functions on Full Browser:
ăťPhone To function
ăťFlash movies
ăťScreen memos
ăťPDF files
Full Browser Display
âŚ
: Displaying in multiple windows
âŚWindow number/Number of windows
âŚ
: During communication in another window
: During communication in another frame
âŚ
: Phone Mode
: PC Mode
âŚ
: Displaying an enlarged frame
Full Browser Display
â Operations for the Full Browser display
Key operation
Operation
Phone Mode
PC Mode
Return to previous Co or 1
page
Forward to next
page
Vo or 3
Scroll display
Bo
Mo
Scroll display page > or m(
)/c(
by page
pTo scroll to the top/end of the page,
>(for at least one second),
m(
)/c(
) (for at
least one second) or a/s
Reload
Enlarge/Reduce
display size
7 to reduce the display size
8 to display in standard size
9 to enlarge the display size
Display Bookmark 0
List
Switch Display Mode
Two modes, âPhone modeâ and âPC modeâ, are
available for the Full Browser display.
iFull BrowserFull Browser settings
Display Mode setting
Phone mode or PC mode
Phone mode
. . . Displays an Internet web page to fit in the display
width of the FOMA phone. You do not need to scroll
sideways; you can browse Internet web pages by
scrolling upward and downward.
PC mode
. . . Displays an Internet web page in the same format as
when it is displayed on your personal computer in 800
(width) x 600 (height) dots. You can browse Internet
web pages by scrolling upward, downward, and
sideways.
pEach time you select âChange disp. modeâ from the
Function menu with an Internet web page shown, the
display modes switches.
pWhen displaying in the horizontal display, âPC modeâ is
set automatically, and you cannot change the setting.
Use Operation Mode
Press l (
) from the Full Browser display to
switch to âOperation modeâ. The operation palette is
displayed by switching to Operation Mode, then you
can move to the previous/next page or enlarge/reduce
the display size.
No:Moves to the previous/next page.
Bo:Enlarges/reduces the display size.
Open Multiple Windows
You can simultaneously open up to five Internet web
pages via Full Browser.
pYou can switch the simultaneously opened Internet web
pages to show one by one.
Full Browser displayi(
Open new windowSelect an item.
Bookmark . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet
web page stored in Bookmark. (See
page 157)
Enter URL . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet
web page by entering a URL. (See
âDisplaying Internet Web Pagesâ on
page 156)
Home . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet
web page set as Home URL.
Link . . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show a page of
the link highlighted on the Full Browser
display.
pSee page 262 for how to switch or close the window.
Information
pSome Internet web pages have links configured to open in
new windows. When you open such a link, the new window
opens even if you do not perform above operations.
Display a Page Composed of Frames
You can display Internet web pages composed of
frames. You can select a frame, and enlarge each
selected frame for displaying.
All frames
Enlarged by frame
pTo return to the display for all frames, press r or
select âAll framesâ from the Function menu.
Information
pWhen an Internet web page has many divided frames, you
might not be able to open all frames. â
â is added to the
frames that you could not open.
261
Full Browser/PC Movie
From an Internet web page composed of
framesPress o
to highlight a frame, and
press Oo(
).
Upload Images
You can upload JPEG or GIF images stored in the
FOMA phone to an Internet web page.
pProcedure for uploading images differs depending on the
Internet web page. Follow the instructions on the display.
Information
pWhen the total size of the selected images exceeds 80
Kbytes, or when the total size of the selected image and
other files exceeds 100 Kbytes, you cannot upload the
images.
pYou may not be able to upload images depending on the
Internet web page.
pYou cannot upload the images whose output from FOMA
phone is prohibited.
Switch from i-mode to Full Browser
You can switch to Full Browser to show the Internet
web pages incorrectly displayed by i-mode.
While a page to be shown in Full Browser is
displayedi(
)Internet
Switch to FBOK
Information
pYou cannot correctly display some Internet web pages.
Function Menu of Full Browser Display
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Full Browser/PC Movie
Add bookmark See page 157.
Bookmark
See page 157.
Enter URL
You can enter a URL to display an Internet
web page.
Select a text box.
Go to step 2 of âDisplaying Internet Web
Pagesâ on page 156.
pThe URL of displaying site is entered
beforehand.
Reload
The contents on the Internet web page is
updated to the latest ones.
Change disp. See page 261.
mode
CHG wide scr. The image is displayed horizontally by
mode
rotating the display 90 degrees to the right.
pWhen it is already displayed horizontally,
the vertical display returns.
Open new
window
262
See page 261.
Function menu
Change
window
Operation/Explanation
You can switch the windows while displaying
the Internet web pages in multiple windows.
Select a window.
Close window You can close the window while displaying
the Internet web pages in multiple windows.
YES
Save image
See page 159.
Add desktop See page 114.
icon
Compose
message
You can compose an i-mode mail message
with the URL of the displayed Internet web
page pasted to the text.
Go to step 2 on page 172.
Home
You can set the displayed Internet web page
(Set as home as Home URL.
URL)
Set as home URLYES
Home
(Display
home)
You can display the Internet web page set as
Home URL.
Display home
Scroll
(Speed)
See page 263.
Scroll
See page 263.
(Focus while
scroll)
Zoom
See page 263.
All frames
You can return to the display for all frames
from the display for the enlarged frame.
Retry
You can play back the displayed animation
from the beginning.
Page info
You can display information of the displayed
Internet web page.
URL or Title
Others
(Set image
display)
You can set whether to display images.
Set image display
See page 263.
Others
See page 155.
(Change CHR
code)
Others
You can set whether to validate cookies.
(Cookie setting) Cookie setting
Go to step 1 of âCookie Settingâ on page 264.
Others
You can delete cookies.
(Delete Cookies) Delete Cookies
Go to step 1 of âDelete Cookiesâ on page 264.
Function menu
Operation/Explanation
Others
You can set whether to send a referer.
(Referer setting) Referer setting
Go to step 1 of âReferer Settingâ on page 264.
Others
(Certificate)
Setting Full Browser
iFull BrowserFull Browser settings
Do the following operations.
Operation/Explanation
Display Mode See page 261.
setting
Scroll
(Speed)
You can set scroll speed.
SpeedHigh speed or Low speed
Scroll
You can set whether to highlight links while
(Focus while scrolling.
Focus while scrollON or OFF
scroll)
Zoom
Operation/Explanation
You can set whether to automatically play
back the downloaded type of PC movies while
obtaining.
ON or OFF
Cookie setting See page 264.
< Full Browser Settings>
Item
PC Movie
auto-play
See page 155.
Information
pThe number of characters of the URL you can paste to the
text is up to 512 half-pitch characters. If the URL contains
512 half-pitch characters or more, you cannot paste it.
Item
Access
setting
You can set whether to use Full Browser.
Yes . . . Uses Full Browser.
No . . . . Displays the cautions at the start of
Full Browser. Check the cautions,
highlight âYesâ and then select âOKâ,
then the setting switches to âYesâ,
and Full Browser becomes available.
Home URL
You can set Home URL.
Select the URL fieldEnter a URLOK
Set image
display
You can set whether to display images.
ON or OFF
Referer setting See page 264.
Script setting You can set whether to validate JavaScript.
JavaScript is a simple program language that
runs on Internet web pages. It is widely used
to create Internet web pages with
movements.
When âValidâ is set, you can use the
JavaScript function to browse Internet web
pages on Full Browser.
Valid or Invalid
Window Open You can set whether to prevent a new window
Guard
from opening automatically by JavaScript.
Valid or Invalid
Check
settings
You can check respective Full Browser
settings.
Reset last
URL
You can erase the URL of the Internet web
page you viewed last.
YES
Information
pIf you replace the UIM with a new one when âYesâ is set, the
setting switches to âNoâ.
pEven when âONâ is set, images might not be displayed
correctly. In this case, â
â is displayed.
pWhen âOFFâ is set, â
â is displayed and the data file is not
received.